Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 281

Parameters

Table

Recommended value

Frequency Band MCC MNC NCC

Cell_Common Cell_Common Cell_Common Cell_Common

GSM900&DCS1800 470 02 0~7

BCC

Cell_Common

0~7

GPRS Support

Cell_Common

support GPRS

EDGE Support

Cell_Common

No

Cellband

Cell_Common

RAC

Cell_Common

As per plan

FH MODE

Cell_Common

As per frequency plan

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Cell_Common

63

Cell Extension Type

Cell_Common

Normal cell

Cell Antenna Hopping

Cell_Common

None

UL DTX

Cell_Common

Shall Use

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Cell_Common

Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Cell_Common

Direct Retry

Cell_Common

Yes

SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed

Cell_Common

Yes

DL PC Allowed TRX Index

Cell_Common TRx

Yes Depend on invidual site

TRX No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Cell Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Site Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Active State

TRx

Activated

Receive Mode

TRx

Depends on BTS/site configuration

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Basic_Parameter

63

DL DTX

Basic_Parameter

No (tunable based on performance)

Direct Retry

Basic_Parameter

Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Basic_Parameter

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Basic_Parameter

Yes

UL DTX

Basic_Parameter

Shall Use

Flex HSN Switch

CH_MGT

Close

Flex MAIO Switch

CH_MGT

Close

Allocation TRX Priority Allowed

CH_MGT

Yes

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)

Call_Control

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H)

Call_Control

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H)

Call_Control

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)

Call_Control

26

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H)

Call_Control

18

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H)

Call_Control

12

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)

Call_Control

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H)

Call_Control

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H)

Call_Control

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)

Call_Control

26

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H)

Call_Control

18

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H)

Call_Control

12

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F)

Call_Control

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F)

Call_Control

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F)

Call_Control

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F)

Call_Control

26

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F)

Call_Control

18

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F)

Call_Control

12

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F)

Call_Control

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F)

Call_Control

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F)

Call_Control

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F)

Call_Control

26

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F)

Call_Control

18

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F)

Call_Control

12

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

Call_Control

24

MS MAX Retrans

Call_Control

N200 of SDCCH

Call_Control

23

AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

Call_Control

24

AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

Call_Control

24

Directed Retry Load Access Threshold

Call_Control

75

T3105(10ms)

HO

Max Resend Times of Phy.Info.

HO

30

ULQuaLimitAMRHR

HO

60

DLQuaLimitAMRHR

HO

60

ULQuaLimitAMRFR

HO

60

DLQuaLimitAMRFR

HO

60

UL Qual. Threshold

HO

50

DL Qual. Threshold

HO

50

MS Power Prediction after HO

HO

No

Inter-System Handover Enable

HO

No

PBGT HO Allowed

HO

Yes

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed

HO

No

Load HO Allowed

HO

Yes

SDCCH HO Allowed

HO

No

PT(s)

Idle_Mode

TO

Idle_Mode

Cell_Bar_Qualify

Idle_Mode

PI

Idle_Mode

Yes

CRH

Idle_Mode

6dB

Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes)

Idle_Mode

60(should same for same LAC)

BS-PA-MFRAMS

Idle_Mode

4 Multiframe Period

BS_AG_BLKS_RES

Idle_Mode

NCC Permitted

Idle_Mode

255

Cell_Bar_Access

Idle_Mode

ATT

Idle_Mode

Yes

T3122(s)

Other_Properties

10

T3111(ms)

Other_Properties

1000

T3109(ms)

Other_Properties

27000

T8(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

T3121(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

T3107(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

T7(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

T3101(ms)

Other_Properties

3000

Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

85

Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

87

Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

92

Interf. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

98

Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

105

Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

110

Filter Length for DL Qual.

Power_Control

Filter Length for UL Qual.

Power_Control

Filter Length for DL RX_LEV

Power_Control

Filter Length for UL RX_LEV

Power_Control

DL Qual. Lower Threshold

Power_Control

DL Qual. Upper Threshold

Power_Control

DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold

Power_Control

20

DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold

Power_Control

30

UL Qual. Lower Threshold

Power_Control

UL Qual. Upper Threshold

Power_Control

UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold

Power_Control

25

UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold

Power_Control

35

PC Interval

Power_Control

Min Access Level Threshold

Data_In_PCU

15

PRACH Blocks

Data_In_PCU

PBCCH Blocks

Data_In_PCU

GPRS Penalty Time

Data_In_PCU

10sec

GPRS Temporary Offset

Data_In_PCU

10dB

T3192

Data_In_PCU

500ms

T3168

Data_In_PCU

500ms

Default

Description

None None 0

This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China is 460. This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC). This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom operator. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique nationwide. The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).

This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.

not support GPRS

This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU) must be configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with GSM, EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which improv This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected, it cannot be changed. GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band. DCS1800: The cell This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state performs location management based on the routing area. Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message. For example, value 0 indic

No

As per plan

This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. As per frequency plan If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement the extended cell. A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay. Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120 This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function. In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t

62

Normal Cell

None

Shall Use

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

Yes

This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

Yes

This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is n This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs (includi This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed.. This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS. The following two points should be paid attention to: 1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX numbers may be discontinuous. 2. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board, one-to-one mapping between them is not mandatory. Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047. Internal 2G cells: 0-2047 External 2G cells: 2048-5047 External 3G cells: 5048-8047 This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a BSC.

Yes

Yes 65535

255

None

65535

Activated

This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.

None

This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU. The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four Diversity Receiver, or Main Diversity. The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do not support Main Diversity. The DBS3900 GSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main Diversity. This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.

62

Yes

This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.

Yes

This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the BTS and the network layout.

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

Yes

This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks on.

Shall Use

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

Close

This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to be used. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, this parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced. Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured.

Close

This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO. In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference among channels occur. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially. In the case of aggressive frequency reuse, the recommended value is set to Yes.

Yes

This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment. If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set to NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective. Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority preferentially. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

15

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

63

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

26

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

16

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

15

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

63

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

24

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

14

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

30

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

22

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

As per plan

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of As per frequency plan the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

18

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

12

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

52

This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the SACCH message. For details of this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 05.08. Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS, the counter S is enabled and the initial value is set to this parameter value. Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time an SACCH message is correctly decoded, the counter S increases by 2.When the counter S is equal to 0, the downlink radio link is considered as failed.Therefore, when the voice or data quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved through power control or channel handover, the connection is to be re-established or released.

4 Times

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure. After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure, it always listens to the messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate Assignment Extend messages, the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified interval.

23

Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

52

This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. For details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).

64

This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).

85

This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry. When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate target cells.

This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08. When the BTS sends physical information to the MS, the BTS starts the timer T3105.If the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS, BTS resends physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. The maximum times for resending physical information is Ny1.

30

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions. Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends the BSC a connection failure message, which can also be a handover failure message. After receiving the message, the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer T3105. During asynchronous handover, the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the BTS. Usually, the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. Upon detecting the bursts, the BTS sends a Physical information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. Meanwhile, the timer T3105 starts. The Physical information containing information about different physical layers guarantees correct MS access. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08.

60

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. An emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality.

60

65

65

60

60

No

No

This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell. When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes.

Yes

This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm. Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong handovers, the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the same layer and hierarchy. The PBGT handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs.

No

This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions.

No

This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled. The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer. The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to adjust abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. If load handovers occur frequently in a partial area, the cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be adjusted.

No

This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled. The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs. This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and 0408. This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.

No

This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. It is invalid for cell reselection. 1: barred 0: allowed Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08. Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority 0 0 Normal Normal 0 1 Barred Barred 1 0 Low Normal 1 1 Low Normal

Yes

Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short), sent on the broadcast channel, indicates whether CRO, TO, and PT are used. Actually, the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. For details, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 0508.In addition, a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection. When PI is set to 1, the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system information and determines whether a cell is reselected. When PI is set to 0, that is, C2 equals C1, the MS determines whether a cell is reselected based on the value of C1.

6dB

This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis.

20

This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update. In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period decreases, the service performance is improved. When the signaling traffic of the network increases, the usage of radio resources drops.In addition, when the location update period decreases, the MS power consumption increases, and the average standby time is greatly shortened.When setting this parameter, take into consideration the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, the load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR. Generally, a larger value is adopted in continuous coverage in urban areas and a smaller value in suburbs, rural areas, or blind spots.

2 Multiframe Period

This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel, that is, the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel. In actual situation, an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.02 and 05.08. If the value of this parameter increases, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell increases, thus reducing the number of MSs served by each paging sub-channel and prolonging the average service time of the MS battery. For details about the calculation of the paging group, see GSM Rec. 05.02. But the delay of paging messages increases, and the system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases. This parameter should be set on the basis that the paging channel is not overloaded. In addition, the value of the parameter should be as small as possible. The load of the paging channels should be periodically measured on the running network. The value of this parameter should be adjusted on the basis of the load. A paging message must be sent simultaneously in all the cells in an LAC. Thus, the capacity of the paging channel in a cell, that is, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell, must be the same as or similar to that in other cells of an LAC.

This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. After the CCCH is configured, this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH. This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance.

11111111

This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. This parameter is an information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages. If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding measurement report to the BTS. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). Each bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit N is 0, the MS does not measure the cell level of NCC N.

No

This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA). Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed. Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed. Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08. Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority 0 0 Normal Normal 0 1 Barred Barred 1 0 Low Normal 1 1 Low Normal

Yes

This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. For different cells in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same. If this parameter is set to Yes, network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off, thus saving the network processing time and network resources. This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS. After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires. This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections. The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires. The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC deactivates the channel, if the timer T3109 expires.

10

1000

27000

10000

This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the outgoing BSC handover fails. This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message. After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. After the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message. In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the timer T7 is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure message. This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure. The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.

10000

10000

10000

3000

85

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

87

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

92

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

98

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

105

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

110

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, reports a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

25

The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

35

The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

20

The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

30

The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as a candidate cell for handover.

15

This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. Value 1 indicates one PRACH. Value 2 indicates two PRACHs. ... Value 12 indicates 12 PRACHs. This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 4. Value 1 indicates one PBCCH. Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs. Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs. Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs. This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent through the system message broadcast in each cell. When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires. This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS. Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time. Value infinity indicates an infinity offset.

10sec

10dB

500ms

This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after receiving the last data block. When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts T3192 at the same time. If T3192 expires, the MS releases the TBF resources and monitors paging channels. During the TBF release process, if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message, the MS responds immediately. If the MS does not receive the Packet Uplink Assignment message during the TBF release process, the MS enters the packet idle mode. If the MS is in dual transfer mode, it enters the dedicated mode.

500ms

This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message. This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description, T3168 is started to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message from the network. If the MS receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message before T3168 expires, T3168 is reset. Otherwise, the MS initiates the PS access procedure again for four times. If the Packet Uplink Assignment message is still not received, the MS regards that this uplink TBF establishment has failed.

Configuration Policy

NSN PARAMETER

Name
BAND None None This parameter should be set as required. NCC 1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the received co-channel signals are useful signals. If a burst is incon MCC MNC

BCC

None GENA None EGENA

None BAND

None RAC

None HOP The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected.

DMAX

None DMAX

None AHOP The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink

DTX

The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment RE If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based RXP None DR None DYNAMIC_SDCCH None None PENA TRX_ID

None

TRX_NUM

None CI None If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be activated. Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated. When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be set to Not Activated if the Active State of the upper-level BTS is set to Not Activated. BTS_ID

STATE

None

RDIV The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected.

DMAX

The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC.To enable this function, the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC side. If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side, downlink DTX cannot be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter. If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side, the setting of this parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in a cell.

DOWNLINK DTX

None DR If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink and downlink levels. RXP The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment lasts for a long time, and therefore the subscriber cannot wait and hooks on. It is recommended that this parameter be set to Yes. RE The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. DTX

None HSN1

None

FLEXIBLE MAIO MANAGEMENT

None TRP

None

HRH3

None

HRH2

None

HRH1

None

HRTD3

None

HRTD2

None

HRTD1

None

HRH3

None

HRH2

None

HRH1

None

HRTU3

None

HRTU2

None

HRTU1

None

FRH3

None

FRH2

None

FRH1

None

FRTD3

None

FRTD2

None

FRTD1

None

FRH3

None

FRH2

None

FRH1

None

FRTU3

None

FRTU2

None

FRTU1

If this parameter is set to a small value, radio links are likely to be faulty and therefore call drops occur. If this parameter is set to a great value, a long time lasts before an MS disconnects a call, and therefore resource usage is low. This parameter takes effect on the downlink.

RLT

This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is high, it is recommended this parameter be set to 1. RET

None T200S The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode. AHRLT The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode. ARLT If the value of the parameter is too high, the cells with heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that the handover does not make sense. If the value of the parameter is too low, it is difficult to select candidate target cells.

DRT

The physical information is sent over the FACCH. Four TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. If the value of T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms, the BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer T3105 expires for the first time.If the transmission of the physical information over the FACCH is not complete, the expiration is invalid because the time is shorter than an FACCH period.Considering the previous factors, 20 ms is the reasonable minimum value for this parameter. At present, the default value of this parameter is 70 ms. T3105

The value of this parameter can be increased when handover becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of clock problems or poor transmission.An MS can be handed over only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO DETECT (120-180 ms). Otherwise, the handover fails.

NY1 The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.

QURH

QDRH

QURF

QDRF

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. QUR

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. QDR If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS does not use the maximum transmit power, and thus the handover success rate is decreased, but the network interference is reduced.

POPT

None ISHO

Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference. EPB

It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. FMT

If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used.

TRHO When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled on the existing network, this parameter can be set to Yes.

ESD

None PET None TEO

The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system.

QUA

The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to following conditions: Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops below 0 within 5s.If yes, the path loss is too large. C2 of an appropriate non-serving cell exceeds that of the serving cell in 5s and the following conditions are met: The C2 of a new cell in another LAC minus CRH (broadcast in the system information 3 and 4 of the serving cell) exceeds C2 of the serving cell in 5s. A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s, and the C2 of the new cell minus 5 dB constantly exceeds the C2 of the serving cell in 5s. A better cell exists if the above conditions are met.If a better cell exists, the MS reselects a cell,and does not go to the previous cell within 5s.

PI An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. Thus, the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, ping-pong location updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the cell that the MS camps on for a long time may not be the best after the LA changes. HYS

It is recommended that you select a greater value, such as 16, 20, or 25, in the area with heavy traffic, but a smaller value, such as 2 or 3, in the area with light traffic. To properly specify the value of this parameter, it is necessary to perform overall and long-term measurement on the entities involved regarding their processing capability and traffic, such as the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, and the load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR. The location update period in the MSC must be greater than that in the BSC. In the GSM system, it is possible that a powered-on MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request within a long period. When the MS reselects another cell (in the same LAC), the MS is restarted through T3212 timeout if the T3212 of the new cell differs from that of the original cell. When this parameter differs in the cells of the same LAC, it is possible that the MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request for a long period. In this case, system plays "The subscriber you dial is power off." even though the called MS is on. In an LAC, the value of this parameter should be the same in all cells. PER

The larger this parameter is set, the larger the number of paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each paging sub-channel. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of paging messages and reduce the system performance.

MFR

None AG

The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call drops.

PLMN

The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0, only handovers are allowed in a cell, and direct access of an MS is not allowed. This condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. For a common cell, this parameter should be set to 0. The value of CBA affects the network access of an MS.

BAR

None ATT If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the channel load and influence the access success rate. T3122

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. T3111 If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.

T3109

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the assignment success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the immediate assignment success rate.

T8

T3121

T3107

T7

T3101

None

BO5

None

BO4

None

BO3

None

BO2

None

BO1

None

BO0

On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. QDS On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. QUS On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. LDS On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. LUS

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.

LDR

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.

UDR

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. LDR If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. UDR

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal quality of the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the signal quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.

LUR

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the conversation quality is degraded.

UUR If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. LUR If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected Level at HO Access. UUR If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the resources. None

INT SL

None PRB

None PBB If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell, this parameter should be set to a high value when the coverage area of the micro cell is large.

GPET

None GTEO

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the TBF resources (including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. If no downlink data needs to be sent, many resources are not used but occupied for a long time. If the timer is set to a smaller value, the MS releases the TBF resources within a shorter period. However, if the network sends new downlink PDU data packets, the network must initiate a paging or immediate assignment procedure. Therefore, the downlink TBF establishment takes a longer period. If the download data packets from the network are not received and T3192 does not expire, the network directly sends a Packet Downlink Assignment message to establish a new downlink TBF, thus shortening the TBF establishment time. On one hand, the value of the T3192 timer depends on the average transmission interval between two successive downlink data. On the other hand, you need to comprehensively analyze the traffic models of the cell and take the service load of the cell into consideration. When network resources are sufficient, that is the GPRS congestion rate is low, the T3192 should be set to a large value, shortening the time to establish new TBFs and improving data transmission rate. T3192

If the timer is set to a lower value, the MS can detect the TBF establishment failure within a shorter period. If the TBF establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is short, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment decreases. In addition, the small timer value increases the probability of the retransmission of the packet access request, thus increasing the probability of reassignment by the PCU and wasting system resources. If the timer is set to a higher value, the MS takes a longer period to detect the TBF establishment failure. If the TBF establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is long, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment increases. T3168

Parameter Name
frequency band in use mobile country code mobile network code

Unit

Step Size

Default Value
GSM 900 (0)

BSIC NCC

bsIdentityCode

Obligatory in creation when LCSE not connected to any segment, otherwise read from RNW db.

GPRSenabled

egprsEnabled

frequency band in use

GSM 900 (0)

routing area code

255

HoppingMode

No

msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

TA

255

msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

TA

255

dtxMode

callReestablishmentAllowed

rxLevAccessMin

dBm

-105

drInUse

powerCtrlEnabled TRX ID

Y 1

CellId BTS ID

Administrative State

Locked (3)

diversityUsed

msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

TA

255

drInUse

rxLevAccessMin

dBm

-105

callReestablishmentAllowed

dtxMode

hoppingSequenceNumber1

trxPriorityInTCHAlloc

amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis3

0.5dB

amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis2

0.5dB

amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis1

0.5dB

radioLinkTimeout

SACCH

20

maxNumberRetransmission

SDCCH LAPDm T200

AMR HR Radio Link Timeout

AMR Radio Link Timeout

drThreshold

dBm

-100

maxNumberOfRepetitions amrHoHrThrUlRxQual

amrHoHrThrDlRxQual

amrHoFrThrUlRxQual

amrHoFrThrDlRxQual

hoThresholdsQualUL

hoThresholdsQualDL

msPwrOptLev

dBm

enablePwrBudgetHandover

Yes

fastMovingThreshold

SACCH

trhoTargetLevel

dBm

enableSDCCHHandover

penaltyTime

sec

20

20

temporaryOffset

dB

10

cellBarQualify

cellReselectParamInd

cellReselectHysteresis

dB

timerPeriodicUpdateMS

hours

0.5

noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging

noOfBlocksForAccessGrant

plmnPermitted

NCC

cellBarred

allowIMSIAttachDetach

interferenceAveragingProcess

dBm

-47

interferenceAveragingProcess

dBm

-90

interferenceAveragingProcess

dBm

-95

interferenceAveragingProcess

dBm

-100

interferenceAveragingProcess

dBm

-105

interferenceAveragingProcess

dBm

-110

pcAveragingQualDL / windows size

SACCH

pcAveragingQualUL / windows size

SACCH

pcAveragingLevDL / windows size

SACCH

pcAveragingLevUL / windows size

SACCH

PC Lower Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual

PC Upper Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual

PC Lower Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level

PC Upper Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level

PC Lower Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual

PC Upper Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual

PC Lower Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level

PC Upper Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level

powerControlInterval rxLevMinCell

sec dBm

2 -100

bsPRACHBlocks

bsPBCCHBlocks

gprsPenaltyTime

sec

10s

10

gprsTemporaryOffset

dB

Range
GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800 (1), GSM 1900 (2), GSM 800 (5) 3 characters 2...3 characters

0...7

07

NoYes

Y/N

GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800 (1), GSM 1900 (2), GSM 800 (5)

0255

No/BB/RF

0...255

0...2

Yes/No

-110...-47

Yes/No

Yes/No 1...16

165535 1...10 characters

Y/N

0...255

Yes/No

-110...-47

Yes/No

0...2

0...63/N

0...2

015

015

015

4...64

1, 2, 4 or 7

-110-47

5...35

0...7

0...7

-110... -47/ N

Yes/No

0...255

-109... -47/ N

Yes/No

20...640

0...70

Y/N

Y/N

0...14

0 / 0.1...25.5

2...9

0...7

07

Yes/No

Yes/No

-47FIXED

-110...-47

-110...-47

-110...-47

-110...-47

-110FIXED

1...32

1...32

1...32

1...32

0...31 -110...-47

012

14

10320

070

Parameter Name UL DTX Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Old Value Shall Use NA

Proposed Value Shall Use Yes

Remarks

Unit None

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Not matched with other vendor

TCH Immediate Assignment Direct Retry UL PC Allowed DL PC Allowed Encryption Algorithm

No Yes No No NA

No Yes Yes Yes <10000000>

None None None Tunable based on None performance Bit Period

DL DTX MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

NA

No 63 NO NO Yes 20 (32 Satelite Cells) 0 255 1

Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier NA Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment ATT Tx-integer(RACH Timeslot(equals to a TDMA frame,4.615ms)) Cell_Bar_Access NCC Permitted BS_AG_BLKS_RES BS-PA-MFRAMS Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) CRH PI Cell_Bar_Qualify CRO(2dB) ACS TO PT(s) SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) NA Yes NA NA NA NA

4 Multiframe 4 Multiframe Period Period NA 6dB Yes 0 0 No 0 NA 24 40 6dB Yes 0 0 No 0 0 24 Need to standerdize Ericsson 60

RACH Busy Threshold

To identify MS request 16 at -94 dBm or worst coverage

Paging Times Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable Directed Retry Load Access Threshold Speech Version

1 NA NA NA

1 Disable

Tunable based on performance

Need to discuss with Huawei 47 Allowed & Recover When Check Res. 200 1 60 50 50 150 200 60 60 No 5 5 5 23 29 34 No 4 If use Imm_Ass Retrans, Default

TRX Aiding Function Control

NA

None

Random Access Error Threshold RACH Min.Access Level T200 SDCCH(5ms) T200 FACCH/F(5ms) T200 FACCH/H(5ms) T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) Use LAPDm N200 N200 of Establish N200 of Release N200 of SACCH N200 of SDCCH N200 of FACCH/Half rate N200 of FACCH/Full rate Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit(ms)

NA 0 60 50 50 150 200 60 60 No 5 5 5 23 29 34 No NA

Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass

NA

MS MAX Retrans Common Access Control Class Special Access Control Class Emergent Call Disable Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) ECSC

4 (7 for 4 (7 for Satelite Site) Satelite Site) Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected NA 20 Yes No 24 Yes All vendor same platform

MBR

0(for normal cell); 2(near to Dualband cell) Yes 1 NA

0(for normal cell); 2(near to Dualband cell) Yes 1 NA 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter

Power Deviation Indication Power Deviation(2dB) Serving Band Reporting

Qsearch I

NA

NA

Qsearch C Initial

NA

NA

FDD Q Offset

NA

NA

FDD REP QUANT

NA

NA

FDD MULTIRAT Reporting

NA

NA

FDD Qmin

NA

NA

Qsearch P

NA

NA

3G Search PRIO

NA

NA

Invalid BSIC Reporting

NA

NA

Scale Order

NA

NA

Qsearch C

NA

NA

900 Reporting Offset

NA

NA

900 Reporting Threshold

NA

NA

1800 Reporting Offset

NA

NA

1800 Reporting Threshold

NA

NA

3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter Tunable based on performance

FDD Reporting Offset

NA

NA

FDD Reporting Threshold

NA

NA

Allow Reassign Allow EMLPP Immediate Assignment Opt. Short Message Uplink Disabled Short Message Downlink Disabled Frequency Band of Reassign Max Assignment Retry Times AMR ACS(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) AMR Starting Mode(F) AMR ACS(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) AMR Starting Mode(H) Co-BSC/MSC Adj SDCCH HO Allowed Intracell HO Allowed

No No NA No No No NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA No No Yes

No No NO No No Same Band 2 165 12 18 26 2 3 3 12 18 26 2 3 3 1 15 12 18 26 2 3 3 12 18 26 2 3 3 0 No No Yes

Tunable based on performance

None

Load HO Allowed MS Fast Moving HO Allowed Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed PBGT HO Allowed Level HO Allowed Fringe HO Allowed BQ HO Allowed TA HO Allowed Concentric Circles HO Allowed Interference HO Allowed Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold Edge HO Watch Time(s) Edge HO Valid Time(s) Layer HO Watch Time(s) Layer HO Valid Time(s) PBGT Watch Time(s) PBGT Valid Time(s) Inter-layer HO Threshold Inter-layer HO Hysteresis

No No No Yes NA NA NA NA NA NA 5 10 5 4 5 4 5 4 NA 3

Yes No No Yes NO Yes Yes Yes Yes (for MB cell), No for othres Yes 15 20 5 4 5 4 5 4 25 3

Tunable based on None performance None None

Grade Grade Second Second Second Second Second Second Tunable based on dB performance Tunable based on Grade performance Second Second

Min DL Level on Candidate Cell Intracell F-H HO Allowed Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s) F2H HO th H2F HO th Min Interval for TCH HOs Min Interval for SDCCH HOs Min Interval for Consecutive HOs Min Interval for Emerg.HOs Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed Penalty Allowed MS Power Prediction after HO MR.Preprocessing Transfer Original MR Transfer BS/MS Power Class Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR Allowed M.R Number Lost

15 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 6 NA NA Yes No NA NA Yes NA NA

10 Yes 5 4 30 10 4 2 6 2 NO Yes No Yes NO Yes Once Every Second 4

Second

None

None

Number of MR

Filter Length for TCH Level Filter Length for TCH Qual Filter Length for SDCCH Level Filter Length for SDCCH Qual Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV Filter Length for TA Penalty Level after HO Fail Penalty Time after HO Fail(s) Penalty Level after BQ HO Penalty Time after BQ HO(s) Penalty Level after TA HO Penalty Time after TA HO(s) Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s) TA Threshold DL Qual. Threshold UL Qual. Threshold UL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO DL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO Filter Parameter A1 Filter Parameter A2 Filter Parameter A3 Filter Parameter A4 Filter Parameter A5 Filter Parameter A6 Filter Parameter A7 Filter Parameter A8 Filter Parameter B No Dl Mr.HO Allowed No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit System Flux Threshold for Load HO Load HO Threshold Load Req.on Candidate Cell Load HO Bandwidth Load HO Step Period Load HO Step Level MS Fast-moving Watch Cells MS Fast-moving Valid Cells MS Fast-moving Time Threshold MAX Consecutive HO Times Forbidden time after MAX Times Interval for Consecutive HO Jud. Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) UL Expected Level at HO Access

6 NA 2 NA 6 6 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 5 5 NA NA NA NA 20 6 NA NA 35

6 6 2 3 6 6 30 10 30 10 63 10 30 255 50 50 40 40 30 35 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 Yes 60 8 10 5 2 25 10 5 NA NA 15 3 20 6 30 40 35

Number of MR None Number of MR Number of MR

dB dB

None None None None None None None None None

dB Second dB None None Times Second Second dB Grade

K Bias UL to OL HO Allowed OL to UL HO Allowed RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed TA for UO HO Allowed UO Signal Intensity Difference RX_LEV Threshold RX_LEV Hysteresis RX_QUAL Threshold TA Threshold TA Hysteresis UO HO Watch Time(s) UO HO Valid Time(s) Assign Optimum Layer Assign-optimum-level Threshold TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer OtoU HO Received Level Threshold UtoO HO Received Level Threshold UtoO Traffic HO Allowed Traffic Threshold of Underlay Underlay HO Step Period(s) Underlay HO Step Level Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail Outgoing-RAT HO Allowed

NA Yes Yes NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 NA NA System optimization NA NA NA NA System optimization Underlaid subcell NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

0 Yes Yes Yes Yes No 0 40 NA 50 63 0 5 4 System optimization 35 63 No 0 System optimization Underlaid subcell 20 35 Yes

Need to discuss with Huawei None None None None None None None dB None Bit Period Bit Period Second Second None dBm Bit Period None Bit Period None None Grade Grade None Need to discuss with Huawei

5 5 5 30 5 3 NA 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter

Second None Second Second Second None

Better 3G Cell HO Allowed

NA

NA

Inter-RAT HO Preference

NA

NA

HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell

NA

NA

3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter None 10 ms Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade SACCH Period SACCH Period None Number of MR

RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

NA

NA

Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

NA

NA

3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s)

NA

NA

3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s)

NA

NA

Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP

NA

NA

Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP

NA

NA

Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP

NA

NA

Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP

NA

NA

Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT

NA

NA

Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT Max Resend Times of Phy.Info. T3105(10ms) PC Interval UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold UL Qual. Upper Threshold UL Qual. Lower Threshold DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold DL Qual. Upper Threshold DL Qual. Lower Threshold Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Filter Length for UL Qual. Filter Length for DL Qual. MR. Compensation Allowed UL MR. Number Predicted

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

NA 30 7 NA 35 25 0 4 30 20 0 4 4 NA 4 NA Yes 1

DL MR. Number Predicted MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 0 MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 1 MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 2 MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff BTS PC Class AMR PC Interval AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV AMR Filter Length for UL Qual AMR Filter Length for DL Qual. AMR MR. Compensation Allowed AMR UL MR. Number Predicted AMR DL MR. Number Predicted AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold AMR ULQual. Upper Threshold AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 0 AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 1 AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 2 AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff AMR BTS PC Class Idle SDCCH Threshold N1

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

1 6 4 2 6 16 8 5 10 5 10 16 3 4 4 4 4 Yes 1 1 35 25 0 4 30 20 0 4 6 4 2 6 16 8 5 10 5 10 16 2

Number of MR dB dB dB dB dB dB None dB None dB Grade None SACCH Period SACCH Period SACCH Period SACCH Period None MR Number MR Number Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade dB dB dB dB dB Grade dB None dB None dB None

Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed Idle TCH Threshold N1 Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%) Interf. Priority Allowed Active CH Interf. Meas.Allowed Allocation TRX Priority Allowed History Record Priority Allowed Balance Traffic Allowed Interf.of UL Level Threshold Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold Interf.of DL Level Threshold Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold Filter Length for TCH Level Filter Length for TCH Qual. Filter Length for SDCCH Level Filter Length for SDCCH Qual. Updata Period of CH Record(min) Updata Freq.of CH Record AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold TCH req suspend interval(s) Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid Subcell Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Underlaid Subcell Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted

80 60 NA NA NA NA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes NA NA NA NA 6 6 2 2 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

80 60 Yes Need to discuss with Huawei 1 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 30 50 25 50 6 6 2 2 30 2 Yes 2 60 Yes 30 30 Need to discuss with Huawei <011011100 0> Yes 20 40 55 70 80 90 3

None Second None

Minute Percentage None None None None None Grade Grade Grade Grade Number of MR Number of MR None None Minute None

Second

NA

Data service Allowed SMCBC DRX Cell Load0 Threshold Cell Load1 Threshold Cell Load2 Threshold Cell Load3 Threshold Cell Load4 Threshold Cell Load5 Threshold Cell Load Change Delay

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

None None

Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm)

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 110 105 98 92 87 85 20

Need to discuss with Huawei

Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms)) NA

Max RC Power Reduction(2dB) Frame Start Time DC Bias Voltage Threshold Power Output Error Threshold Power Output Reduction Threshold VSWR TRX Unadjusted Threshold VSWR TRX Error Threshold Radio Resource Report Period(s) CCCH Load Indication Period(s) CCCH Load Threshold Overload Indication Period Average RACH Load Timeslot Number Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree) Included Angle(Degree)

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 15 NA NA NA 65535 3 2 2 2 2 10 15 80 15 5000 360 360

Need to discuss with Huawei

Second

PWRC

Not selected Yes

Discard BCCH TS Power while calculating Power Control in BBHopping

MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Support Half Rate Abis Flow Control Permitted Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) Directly Magnifier Site Flag Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout) Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited DM response) Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error)

5 (900), 0 (1800) NA Yes NA NA NA NA NA

5 (900), 0 (1800) Yes Yes 15 No 1 1 1

Second None None None None

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail) NA Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO access fail) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM intervention) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not available) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other) Drop Optimize Release Indication Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link Failure Drop Optimize Equipment Failure Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time Drop Optimize Resource Check Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover Timeout Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch T3101(ms) ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) T3103A(ms) T3103C(ms) T7(ms) T3107(ms) T3121(ms) T8(ms) T3109(ms) T3111(ms) TREESTABLISH(ms) T3122(s) NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Yes 3000 5000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 27000 1000 15000 10

None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms

Parameters

Table

Recommended Value Single band 900MHz

Default

Multiband

Frequency Band

Cell_Common

GSM900

GSM900&DCS1800

Administrative State

Cell_Common

Unlocked

Unlocked

Layer of the Cell

Cell_Common

MCC

Cell_Common

470

470

None

MNC

Cell_Common

02

02

None

NCC

Cell_Common

0~7

0~7

BCC

Cell_Common

0~7

0~7

Cell Priority

Cell_Common

Prior-1

Prior-1

Prior-1

Activity Status

Cell_Common

Activated

Activated

Activated

PCU

Cell_Common

255

255

255

GPRS Support

Cell_Common

support GPRS

support GPRS

not support GPRS

Support Baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

EDGE Support

Cell_Common

No

No

No

8PSK power attenuation grade

Cell_Common

Support NACC

Cell_Common

No

No

No

Support PACKET SI STATUS

Cell_Common

No

No

No

Support NC2

Cell_Common

No

No

No

PCU Support 64 Neighbor Cells

Cell_Common

No

No

No

Level report switch

Cell_Common

Support

Support

Support

Cellband

Cell_Common

RAC

Cell_Common

As per plan

As per plan

As per plan

Support DTM

Cell_Common

Not Support

Not Support

Not Support

Support Enhanced DTM Cell_Common

Not Support

Not Support

Not Support

Encryption Algorithm

Cell_Common

00000001

00000001

FH MODE

Cell_Common

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

DL DTX

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Cell_Common

62

62

62

Cell Extension Type

Cell_Common

Normal cell

Normal cell

Normal Cell

Cell Antenna Hopping

Cell_Common

None

None

None

Enhanced Concentric Allowed

Cell_Common

No

Yes

Yes

Cell Type

Cell_Common

Normal Cell

Concentric Cell

Normal cell

Attributes of UL And OL Cell_Common Subcells

NONE

NONE

NONE

BCCH Concentric Attribute

Cell_Common

None

Underlaid Subcell

None

UL DTX

Cell_Common

Shall Use

Shall Use

Shall Use

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Cell_Common

TCH Immediate Assignment

Cell_Common

No

No

No

Direct Retry

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

UL PC Allowed

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

DL PC Allowed

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

Allow Dynamic Voltage Cell_Common Adjustment

Yes

Yes

Yes

TRX Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

65535

TRX No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

255

Cell Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

None

Site Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

65535

Board Type

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

None

Active State

TRx

Activated

Activated

Activated

Abis Mode

TRx

Auto

Auto

Auto

Cabinet No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

Subrack No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

Slot No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

None

TEI

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

Out-BSC Subrack No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

Out-BSC Slot No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

None

Out-BSC Port No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

None

Out-BSC Timeslot No. (8K)

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

255

RSL In Site Port No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

255

RSL In Site Timeslot No.(8K)

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

255

RSL Logic No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

2048

Hop Type

TRx

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

None

Power Level

TRx

Power Type

TRx

Depends on BTS/site configuration

Depends on BTS/site configuration

Default

HW_Concentric Attribute

TRx

Depends on BTS/site configuration

Depends on BTS/site configuration

None

TRX Priority

TRx

Level0

Level0

Level0

Shut Down Enable

TRx

Enable

Enable

Enable

TCH Rate Adjust Allow

TRx

Yes

Yes

No

TRX 8PSK Level

TRx

Wireless Link Alarm Flag

TRx

No

No

No

Abnormal Release Statistic Base

TRx

100

100

100

Abnormal Warn Threshold

TRx

100

100

100

Abnormal Release Threshold

TRx

50

50

50

Statical Period of Notraffic(5min)

TRx

48

48

48

Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit

TRx

Yes

Yes

Yes

WLA Prompting Recover Period(5min)

TRx

12

12

12

Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour)

TRx

End Time of WLA Detection(hour)

TRx

22

22

22

Up Down Balance Basic TRx Difference

Up Down Balance Floating Range

TRx

30

30

30

Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold

TRx

80

80

80

Receive Mode

TRx

Depends on BTS/site configuration

Depends on BTS/site configuration

None

Send Mode

TRx

Depends on BTS/site configuration

Depends on BTS/site configuration

None

Allow Shutdown of TRX TRx Power Amplifier

Yes

Yes

No

Antenna Hopping Index TRx

No

No

No

Power Finetune

TRx

Default

Default

Default

TRX Antenna Hopping

TRx

None

None

None

Reverse Out-BSC Slot No.

TRx

255

255

255

Reverse Out-BSC Port No.

TRx

255

255

255

Reverse Out-BSC Timeslot No.(8K)

TRx

255

255

255

Reverse RSL In Site Port No.

TRx

255

255

255

Reverse RSL In Site Timeslot No.(8K)

TRx

255

255

255

Transmission Type of Abis Interface

TRx

TDM

TDM

TDM

Maximum PDCH numbers of carrier

TRx

MaxAbisTSOccupied

TRx

32

32

32

Co-TRX for Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT)

TRx

255

255

255

InHDLCIndex

TRx

65535

65535

65535

HubHDLCIndex

TRx

65535

65535

65535

TRXNoInHub

TRx

255

255

255

XPUSlotNo

TRx

TRX Ability

TRx

PhysicalPassNo

TRx

Priority

TRx

NONE

QTRU Priority

TRx

255

255

RevInHDLCIndex

TRx

65535

65535

65535

Time Slot Power Rerserve

TRx

Allow Dynamic Voltage Basic_Parameter Adjustment

Yes

Yes

Yes

Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

Yes

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Basic_Parameter

63

63

62

DL DTX

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

Yes

Encryption Algorithm

Basic_Parameter

DL PC Allowed

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

Yes

UL PC Allowed

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

Yes

Direct Retry

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

Yes

TCH Immediate Assignment

Basic_Parameter

No

No

No

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Basic_Parameter

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

Yes

UL DTX

Basic_Parameter

Shall Use

Shall Use

Shall Use

GSM900 Band Traffic Load Share Threshold

CH_MGT

25

25

25

Channel Assignment Allowed for Insufficient CH_MGT Power

No

No

Yes

Qtru Down Link Path Loss Compensation

CH_MGT

Qtru Estimate Bts Power

CH_MGT

35

35

35

Qtru Down Power Inadequate Last Time

CH_MGT

Qtru Down Power Inadequate Stat Time

CH_MGT

Qtru Power Sharing

CH_MGT

None

None

None

Observed time of uplink received level difference

CH_MGT

Duration of uplink received level difference

CH_MGT

Smooth factor of uplink CH_MGT received level

Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels

CH_MGT

100

100

100

Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load

CH_MGT

Yes

Yes

Yes

Tch Traffic Busy Underlay Threshold

CH_MGT

50

50

50

Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid CH_MGT Subcell

50

50

50

Flex HSN Switch

CH_MGT

Close

Close

Close

Flex MAIO Switch

CH_MGT

Close

Close

Close

Fix Abis Prior Choose CH_MGT Abis Load Threshold(%)

80

80

80

Flex Abis Prior Choose CH_MGT Abis Load Threshold(%)

80

80

80

TCH req suspend interval(s)

CH_MGT

60

60

60

AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold

CH_MGT

40

40

40

AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed

CH_MGT

As per plan

As per plan

As per plan

Update Freq.of CH Record

CH_MGT

Update Period of CH Record(min)

CH_MGT

30

30

30

Filter Length for SDCCH CH_MGT Qual.

Filter Length for SDCCH CH_MGT Level

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

Filter Length for TCH Qual.

CH_MGT

Yes

Yes

Filter Length for TCH Level

CH_MGT

Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold

CH_MGT

40

40

40

Interf.of DL Level Threshold

CH_MGT

25

25

25

Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold

CH_MGT

40

40

40

Interf.of UL Level Threshold

CH_MGT

10

10

10

History Record Priority CH_MGT Allowed

Yes

Yes

Yes

Allocation TRX Priority Allowed

CH_MGT

Yes

Yes

Yes

Active CH Interf. Meas.Allowed

CH_MGT

Yes

Yes

Yes

Interf. Priority Allowed

CH_MGT

Yes

Yes

Yes

TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%)

CH_MGT

50

50

TIGHT BCCH Switch

CH_MGT

No

No

No

Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT) CH_MGT Supported

Not Support

DPBT

Not Support

Channel Allocate Strategy

CH_MGT

Capability preferred

Capability preferred

Capability preferred

Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed

CH_MGT

Yes

Yes

Yes

TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s)

CH_MGT

60

60

60

Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum

CH_MGT

80

80

80

Idle SDCCH Threshold N1

CH_MGT

AMR Starting Mode(H)

Call_Control

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)

Call_Control

10

10

15

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H)

Call_Control

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H)

Call_Control

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)

Call_Control

30

30

63

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H)

Call_Control

18

18

26

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H)

Call_Control

12

12

16

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)

Call_Control

10

10

15

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H)

Call_Control

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H)

Call_Control

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)

Call_Control

30

30

63

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H)

Call_Control

18

18

24

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H)

Call_Control

12

12

14

AMR ACS(H)

Call_Control

1101

1101

1101

AMR Starting Mode(F)

Call_Control

AMR DL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.hyst3(F)

AMR DL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.hyst2(F)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F)

Call_Control

AMR DL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.th3(F)

38

38

30

AMR DL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.th2(F)

28

28

22

AMR DL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.th1(F)

As per plan

As per plan

As per plan

AMR UL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.hyst3(F)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F)

Call_Control

AMR UL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.hyst1(F)

AMR UL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.th3(F)

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

AMR UL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.th2(F)

Yes

Yes

18

AMR UL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.th1(F)

20

20

12

AMR ACS(F)

Call_Control

11100100

11100100

11100100

Max Assignment Retry Call_Control Times

Frequency Band of Reassign

Call_Control

Same Band

Different Band

Different Band

Short Message Downlink Disabled

Call_Control

No

No

No

Immediate Assignment Call_Control Opt.

No

No

No

Abis Resource Adjustment TCHH Function Switch

Call_Control

No

No

No

Allow EMLPP

Call_Control

No

No

No

Allow Reassign

Call_Control

Yes

Yes

Yes

TDD Cell Threshold

Call_Control

TDD Cell offset

Call_Control

Best TDD Cell Number Call_Control

TDD Cell Reselect Diversity(dB)

Call_Control

FDD Reporting Threshold

Call_Control

FDD Reporting Offset

Call_Control

1800 Reporting Threshold

Call_Control

1800 Reporting Offset

Call_Control

900 Reporting Threshold

Call_Control

900 Reporting Offset

Call_Control

Qsearch C

Call_Control

15

15

15

Scale Order

Call_Control

+0dB

+0dB

+0dB

Invalid BSIC Reporting

Call_Control

No

No

No

3G Search PRIO

Call_Control

Yes

Yes

Yes

Qsearch P

Call_Control

15

15

15

FDD Qmin

Call_Control

FDD MULTIRAT Reporting

Call_Control

FDD REP QUANT

Call_Control

RSCP

RSCP

RSCP

FDD Q Offset

Call_Control

Qsearch C Initial

Call_Control

Use Qsearch_I

Use Qsearch_I

Use Qsearch_I

Qsearch I

Call_Control

15

15

15

Serving Band Reporting Call_Control

Power Deviation(2dB)

Call_Control

Power Deviation Indication

Call_Control

Yes

Yes

Yes

MBR

Call_Control

ECSC

Call_Control

No

Yes

NO

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms))

24

24

52

Emergent Call Disable

Call_Control

No

No

No

Special Access Control Call_Control Class

00000

00000

00000

Common Access Control Class

Call_Control

0000000000

0000000000

0000000000

MS MAX Retrans

Call_Control

4 Times

4 Times

4 Times

Max Transmit Times of Call_Control Imm_Ass

Max Delay of Imm_Ass Call_Control Retransmit(ms)

Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter

Call_Control

No

No

No

N200 of FACCH/Full rate

Call_Control

34

34

34

N200 of FACCH/Half rate

Call_Control

29

29

29

N200 of SDCCH

Call_Control

23

23

23

N200 of SACCH

Call_Control

N200 of Release

Call_Control

N200 of Establish

Call_Control

Use LAPDm N200

Call_Control

No

No

No

T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms)

Call_Control

60

60

60

T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms)

Call_Control

60

60

60

T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms)

Call_Control

200

200

200

T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms)

Call_Control

150

150

150

T200 FACCH/H(5ms)

Call_Control

50

50

50

T200 FACCH/F(5ms)

Call_Control

50

50

50

T200 SDCCH(5ms)

Call_Control

60

60

60

RACH Min.Access Level(dbm)

Call_Control

-115

-115

-115

Random Access Error Threshold

Call_Control

200

200

180

TRX Aiding Function Control

Call_Control

Allowed & Recover When Check Res

Allowed & Recover When Check Res

TRX Aiding Not Allowed

Speech Version

Call_Control

11

11

11

AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms))

24

24

52

AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms))

24

24

64

AHR SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period (480ms))

Call_Control

24

24

32

AFR SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period (480ms))

Call_Control

24

24

48

Directed Retry Load Access Threshold

Call_Control

75

75

85

Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable

Call_Control

Disable

Disable

Disable

Paging Times

Call_Control

RACH Busy Threshold

Call_Control

16

16

16

SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period (480ms))

Call_Control

24

24

31

T3105(10ms)

HO

Max Resend Times of Phy.Info.

HO

30

30

30

TDD Better 3G Cell HO HO Allowed

No

No

TDD 3G Better Cell HO HO Valid Time(s)

TDD 3G Better Cell HO HO Watch Time(s)

TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

HO

50

50

50

TDD HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell

HO

25

25

25

TDD Inter-RAT HO Preference

HO

Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold

Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold

Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold

Quick Handover Offset(dB)

HO

68

68

68

Quick Handover Punish HO Value(dB)

63

63

63

Quick Handover Punish HO Time(s)

10

10

10

Ignore Measurement Report Number

HO

Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number

HO

Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number

HO

Quick Handover Last Time (0.5s)

HO

Quick Handover Static Time(0.5s)

HO

Quick Move Speed Threshold(m/s)

HO

80

80

80

Quick Handover Down Trigger Level(dB)

HO

63

63

63

Quick Handover Up Trigger Level(dB)

HO

63

63

63

Inner Cell Serious HO OverLoad Threshold(%)

90

90

90

Number of Satisfactory HO Measurements(s)

As per plan

As per plan

As per plan

Total Number of Measurements(s)

HO

Inter UL And OL Subcells HO Penalty Time(s)

HO

Outgoing OL Subcell HO HO level Threshold(dB)

25

25

25

Incoming OL Subcell HO HO level Threshold(dB)

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

Step Length of OL Subcell Load HO(dB)

HO

Yes

Yes

OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period(s)

HO

10

10

10

Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled

HO

No

No

No

Modified Step Length of HO UL Load HO Period(s)

Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO(dB)

HO

UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Period(s)

HO

Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries of HO UL And OL Subcells(dB)

Distance Between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells(dB)

HO

10

10

10

Allowed Flow Control Level of UL And OL Subcell HO

HO

10

10

10

UL Subcell Serious HO Overload Threshold(%)

90

90

90

UL Subcell General HO Overload Threshold(%)

80

80

Assignment Optimization of OL HO Subcell Allowed Or Not

No

No

No

Assignment Optimization of UL HO Subcell Allowed Or Not

Yes

Yes

Yes

UL Subcell Lower Load HO Threshold(%)

50

50

50

Better 3G Cell HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

3G Better Cell HO Valid HO Time(s)

3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s)

HO

Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

HO

35

35

35

RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

HO

50

50

50

HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell

HO

25

25

25

Inter-RAT HO Preference

HO

Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold

Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold

Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold

Ps UtoO HO Received Level Threshold

HO

35

35

35

Ps OtoU HO Received Level Threshold

HO

25

25

25

ReceiveQualThrshAMR HO HR

60

60

60

ReceiveQualThrshAMRF HO R

65

65

65

En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Step

HO

En Iuo In Cell Load HO Classification HO Period

En Iuo Out Cell Serious HO OverLoad Threshold

90

90

90

En Iuo Out Cell General HO OverLoad Threshold

85

85

85

En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold

HO

30

30

20

MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail

HO

Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s)

HO

10

10

10

Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s)

HO

40

40

40

Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s)

HO

10

10

10

Underlay HO Step Level HO

Underlay HO Step Period(s)

HO

UtoO Traffic HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

UtoO HO Received Level Threshold

HO

32

32

35

OtoU HO Received Level Threshold

HO

18

18

25

Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer

HO

Underlaid Subcell

Underlaid Subcell

Underlaid Subcell

Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC

HO

System Optimization

System Optimization

System Optimization

TA Threshold of ImmeHO Assign Pref.

TA Pref. of ImmeAssign Allowed

HO

No

No

No

TA Threshold of Assignment Pref.

HO

63

63

63

Assign-optimum-level Threshold

HO

35

35

35

Assign Optimum Layer HO

System Optimization

System Optimization

System Optimization

UO HO Valid Time(s)

HO

UO HO Watch Time(s)

HO

TA Hysteresis

HO

TA Threshold

HO

63

63

63

RX_QUAL Threshold

HO

50

50

60

RX_LEV Hysteresis

HO

RX_LEV Threshold

HO

35

35

35

UO Signal Intensity Difference

HO

TA for UO HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

OL to UL HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

UL to OL HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO

HO

80

80

80

RX_QUAL Threshold for HO TIGHT BCCH HO

K Bias

HO

UL Expected Level at HO Access

HO

30

30

30

Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s)

HO

40

40

40

Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO

HO

30

30

30

Interval for Consecutive HO Jud.

HO

Forbidden time after MAX Times

HO

20

20

20

MAX Consecutive HO Times

HO

MS Fast-moving Time Threshold

HO

15

15

15

MS Fast-moving Valid Cells

HO

MS Fast-moving Watch HO Cells

Load HO Step Level

HO

Load HO Step Period

HO

10

10

10

Load HO Bandwidth

HO

25

25

25

Load Req.on Candidate HO Cell

75

75

75

Load HO Threshold

HO

85

85

85

System Flux Threshold HO for Load HO

10

10

10

ULQuaLimitAMRHR

HO

60

60

60

DLQuaLimitAMRHR

HO

60

60

60

ULQuaLimitAMRFR

HO

60

60

65

DLQuaLimitAMRFR

HO

60

60

65

RXLEVOff

HO

RXQUAL12

HO

50

50

50

RXQUAL11

HO

51

51

51

RXQUAL10

HO

52

52

52

RXQUAL9

HO

53

53

53

RXQUAL8

HO

54

54

54

RXQUAL7

HO

55

55

55

RXQUAL6

HO

56

56

56

RXQUAL5

HO

57

57

57

RXQUAL4

HO

58

58

58

RXQUAL3

HO

59

59

59

RXQUAL2

HO

60

60

60

RXQUAL1

HO

70

70

70

Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit

HO

No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit

HO

60

60

60

No Dl Mr.HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

Filter Parameter B

HO

Filter Parameter A8

HO

10

10

10

Filter Parameter A7

HO

10

10

10

Filter Parameter A6

HO

10

10

10

Filter Parameter A5

HO

10

10

10

Filter Parameter A4

HO

10

10

10

Filter Parameter A3

HO

10

10

10

Filter Parameter A2

HO

10

10

10

Filter Parameter A1

HO

10

10

10

UL Qual. Threshold

HO

60

60

60

DL Qual. Threshold

HO

60

60

60

Emergency HO TA Threshold

HO

255

255

255

DtxMeasUsed

HO

Open

Open

Open

CfgPenaltyTimer

HO

255

255

255

UmPenaltyTimer

HO

10

10

10

RscPenaltyTimer

HO

Filter Length for TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK

HO

Filter Length for SDCCH HO NBR_RCVD_BLOCK

Penalty Time after AMR HO TCHF-H HO Fail(s)

30

30

30

Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT

HO

Filter Length for SDCCH HO REP_QUANT

Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP

HO

Filter Length for SDCCH HO CV_BEP

Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP

HO

Filter Length for SDCCH HO MEAN_BEP

Penalty Time after TA HO(s)

HO

30

30

30

Penalty Level after TA HO

HO

63

63

63

Penalty Time after BQ HO(s)

HO

15

15

15

Penalty Level after BQ HO

HO

63

63

63

Penalty Level after HO HO Fail

30

30

30

Filter Length for TA

HO

Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV

HO

Filter Length for SDCCH HO Qual

Filter Length for SDCCH HO Level

Filter Length for TCH Qual

HO

Filter Length for TCH Level

HO

Allowed M.R Number Lost

HO

Min Power Level For Direct Try

HO

25

25

16

Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR

HO

Twice every second

Twice every second

Twice every second

Transfer BS/MS Power Class

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

Transfer Original MR

HO

Yes

Yes

No

MR.Preprocessing

HO

No

No

No

MS Power Prediction after HO

HO

No

No

No

Penalty Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed

HO

No

No

No

Min Interval for Emerg.HOs

HO

Min Interval for Consecutive HOs

HO

Min Interval for SDCCH HO HOs

Min Interval for TCH HOs

HO

ATCBHoSwitch

HO

Open

Open

Open

TIGHT BCCH HO Valid Time(s)

HO

TIGHT BCCH HO Watch HO Time(s)

Quick Handover Enable HO

NO

NO

NO

H2F HO Threshold

HO

10

10

10

F2H HO Threshold

HO

30

30

25

Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s)

HO

Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s)

HO

Intracell F-H HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

YES

Min DL Power on HO Candidate Cell

HO

15

15

15

Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell

HO

10

10

10

Inter-layer HO Hysteresis

HO

Inter-layer HO Threshold

HO

25

25

25

Inter-System Handover HO Enable

No

No

No

PBGT Valid Time(s)

HO

PBGT Watch Time(s)

HO

Layer HO Valid Time(s) HO

Layer HO Watch Time(s)

HO

Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time(s)

HO

Edge HO AdjCell Watch HO Time(s)

Edge HO Valid Time(s) HO

Edge HO Watch Time(s) HO

Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold

HO

20

20

20

Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold

HO

10

10

10

Interference HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

Concentric Circles HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

TA HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

BQ HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

Fringe HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

Level HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

PBGT HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

Load HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

Intracell HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

SDCCH HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

Co-BSC/MSC Adj

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

PT(s)

Idle_Mode

TO

Idle_Mode

ACS

Idle_Mode

No

No

No

CRO(2dB)

Idle_Mode

Cell_Bar_Qualify

Idle_Mode

No

No

No

PI

Idle_Mode

Yes

Yes

Yes

CRH

Idle_Mode

6dB

6dB

6dB

Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes)

Idle_Mode

60

60

20

BS-PA-MFRAMS

Idle_Mode

4 Multiframe Period

4 Multiframe Period

2 Multiframe Period

BS_AG_BLKS_RES

Idle_Mode

NCC Permitted

Idle_Mode

11111111

11111111

11111111

Cell_Bar_Access

Idle_Mode

No

No

No

Tx-integer

Idle_Mode

32

32

32

ATT

Idle_Mode

Yes

Yes

Yes

Timer for UL Data Forward(ms)

Other_Properties

10

10

10

WaitforRelIndAMRHR

Other_Properties

26000

26000

26000

WaitforRelIndAMRFR

Other_Properties

34000

34000

34000

T3103C(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

10000

10000

T3122(s)

Other_Properties

10

10

10

TREESTABLISH(ms)

Other_Properties

15000

15000

15000

T3111(ms)

Other_Properties

1000

1000

1000

T3109(ms)

Other_Properties

27000

27000

27000

T8(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

10000

10000

T3121(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

10000

10000

T3107(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

10000

10000

T7(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

10000

10000

T3103A(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

10000

10000

ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms)

Other_Properties

5000

5000

5000

T3101(ms)

Other_Properties

3000

3000

3000

Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable

Other_Properties

No

No

No

Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Other_Properties Enable

No

No

No

Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed

Other_Properties

No

No

No

Qtru Signal Merge Switch

Other_Properties

No

No

No

MAX Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period

Other_Properties

220

220

220

Average Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period

Other_Properties

180

180

180

Paging Numbers of one Other_Properties Optimizing Msgs

Interval For Sending Paging Optimizing Msgs

Other_Properties

Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface

Other_Properties

Forced turn-on

Forced turn-on

Forced turn-on

Interfere Band Stat Algorithm Type

Other_Properties

Interference Band Interference Band Measurement Measurement Algorithm II Algorithm II

Interference Band Measurement Algorithm II

Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

Lower-level sublink resources preemption switch

Other_Properties

No

No

No

Sublink resources preemption switch

Other_Properties

No

No

No

Force MS to Send Ho Access SWITCH

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

IntraCellHo to Ass SWITCH

Other_Properties

No

No

No

Frequency Scan Result Other_Properties Type

Maximum/Mean Value

Maximum/Mean Value

Maximum/Mean Value

Drop Optimize IntraOther_Properties Cell Handover Timeout

Drop Optimize IntraBsc Out-Cell Handover Other_Properties Timeout

Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Other_Properties Handover Timeout

Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Other_Properties Handover Timeout

Drop Optimize Resource Check

Other_Properties

Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time

Other_Properties

Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure

Other_Properties

Drop Optimize Equipment Failure

Other_Properties

Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link Failure

Other_Properties

Drop Optimize Release Other_Properties Indication

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not available)

Other_Properties

Other_Properties

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM Other_Properties intervention)

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO Other_Properties access fail)

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail)

Other_Properties

Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error)

Other_Properties

Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited DM response)

Other_Properties

Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout)

Other_Properties

Directly Magnifier Site Flag

Other_Properties

No

No

No

Aiding Delay Protect Time(min)

Other_Properties

15

15

15

Abis Flow Control Permitted

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

Support Half Rate

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

No

MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH

Other_Properties

PWRC

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

ActGene

Other_Properties

PS LowPri ServicePRI

Other_Properties

PS HighPRI ServicePRI

Other_Properties

CS Data ServicePRI

Other_Properties

CS Voice ServicePRI

Other_Properties

Included Angle(Degree) Other_Properties

360

360

360

Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree)

Other_Properties

360

360

360

Average RACH Load Timeslot Number

Other_Properties

5000

5000

5000

Overload Indication Period

Other_Properties

15

15

15

CCCH Load Threshold

Other_Properties

80

80

80

CCCH Load Indication Period(s)

Other_Properties

15

15

15

Radio Resource Report Other_Properties Period(s)

10

10

10

Frequency Adjust Value Other_Properties

36671

36671

36671

Frequency Adjust Switch

Other_Properties

NO

NO

NO

VSWR TRX Error Threshold

Other_Properties

VSWR TRX Unadjusted Other_Properties Threshold

Power Output Reduction Threshold

Other_Properties

Power Output Error Threshold

Other_Properties

DC Bias Voltage Threshold

Other_Properties

Frame Start Time

Other_Properties

65535

65535

65535

Max RC Power Reduction(2dB)

Other_Properties

Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms))

Other_Properties

20

20

20

Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

85

85

85

Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

87

87

87

Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

92

92

92

Interf. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

98

98

98

Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

105

105

105

Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

110

110

110

Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold

Other_Properties

50

SMCBC DRX

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

Data service Allowed

Other_Properties

118

118

118

Power boost before HO Other_Properties enabled or not

StartUp

StartUp

not StartUp

Voice quality report switch

Other_Properties

report

report

not report

Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted

Other_Properties

255

255

Yes

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 8(dB)

53

53

53

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 7(dB)

50

50

50

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 6(dB)

47

47

47

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 5(dB)

43

43

43

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 4(dB)

40

40

40

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 3(dB)

30

30

30

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 2(dB)

20

20

20

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 1(dB)

HwIII UL MAX UpStep(dB)

Power_Control

HwIII UL MAX DownStep(dB)

Power_Control

HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

12

12

12

HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

12

12

12

HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

22

22

22

HwIII UL FS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII UL FS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

22

22

22

HwIII UL RexLev Lower Power_Control Threshold

20

20

20

HwIII UL RexLev Upper Power_Control Threshold

30

30

30

HwIII UL Rex Qual.Adjust Factor

Power_Control

HwIII UL RexLev Adjust Power_Control Factor

HwIII UL Rex Qual. Slide Window

Power_Control

HwIII UL RexLev Slide Window

Power_Control

HwIII UL Rex Qual.Exponent Filter Length

Power_Control

HwIII UL RexLev Power_Control Exponent Filter Length

HwIII DL MAX UpStep (dB)

Power_Control

HwIII DL MAX DownStep(dB)

Power_Control

HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual. Power_Control Lower Threshold(dB)

12

12

12

HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

12

12

12

HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

22

22

22

HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

22

22

22

HwIII DL RexLev Lower Power_Control Threshold

25

25

25

HwIII DL RexLev Upper Power_Control Threshold

35

35

35

HwIII DL Rex Qual. Adjust Factor

Power_Control

HwIII DL RexLev Adjust Power_Control Factor

HwIII DL Rex Qual. Slide Window

Power_Control

HwIII DL RexLev Slide Window

Power_Control

HwIII DL Rex Qual. Power_Control Exponent Filter Length

HwIII DL RexLev Power_Control Exponent Filter Length

HwIII Traffic Channel Discard MR Number

Power_Control

HwIII Signal Channel Discard MR Number

Power_Control

HwIII Down Link Power Power_Control Control Adjust Period

HwIII Up Link Power Control Adjust Period

Power_Control

HwIII Number of lost MRs allowed

Power_Control

AMR BTS PC Class

Power_Control

16

16

16

AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff

Power_Control

AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold

Power_Control

AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff

Power_Control

AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Power_Control Threshold

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.

Power_Control

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV

Power_Control

16

16

16

AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Power_Control Value by Qual.

AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 2

Power_Control

AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 1

Power_Control

AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 0

Power_Control

AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold

Power_Control

AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold

Power_Control

AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Power_Control Threshold

30

30

25

AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Power_Control Threshold

40

40

35

AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold

Power_Control

AMR ULQual. Upper Threshold

Power_Control

AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Power_Control Threshold

25

25

20

AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Power_Control Threshold

35

35

30

AMR DL MR. Number Predicted

Power_Control

AMR UL MR. Number Predicted

Power_Control

AMR MR. Power_Control Compensation Allowed

Yes

Yes

Yes

AMR Filter Length for DL Qual.

Power_Control

AMR Filter Length for UL Qual

Power_Control

AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV

Power_Control

AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV

Power_Control

AMR PC Interval

Power_Control

BTS PC Class

Power_Control

16

16

16

DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control

DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold

Power_Control

UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control

UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold

Power_Control

MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.

Power_Control

MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV

Power_Control

16

16

16

MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual.

Power_Control

MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 2

Power_Control

MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 1

Power_Control

MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 0

Power_Control

DL MR. Number Predicted

Power_Control

UL MR. Number Predicted

Power_Control

MR. Compensation Allowed

Power_Control

Yes

Yes

Yes

Filter Length for DL Qual.

Power_Control

Filter Length for UL Qual.

Power_Control

Filter Length for DL RX_LEV

Power_Control

Filter Length for UL RX_LEV

Power_Control

Power Control Algorithm Switch

Power_Control

HWII Power Control

HWII Power Control

HW-II Power Control

DL Qual. Lower Threshold

Power_Control

DL Qual. Upper Threshold

Power_Control

DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold

Power_Control

30

30

25

DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold

Power_Control

40

40

35

UL Qual. Lower Threshold

Power_Control

UL Qual. Upper Threshold

Power_Control

UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold

Power_Control

25

25

20

UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold

Power_Control

35

35

30

PC Interval

Power_Control

Constant of Filtering the Collision Signal Strength for Power Control

Data_In_PCU

Measured Receive Power Level Channel

Data_In_PCU

pdch

pdch

pdch

BTS Power Attenuation on PBCCH

Data_In_PCU

-2dB

-2dB

-2dB

Signal Strength Filter Period in Transfer Mode

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Signal Strength Filter Period in Idle Mode

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Initial Power Level

Data_In_PCU

14

14

14

Alpha Parameter

Data_In_PCU

Maximum Value of N3105

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Maximum Value of N3103

Data_In_PCU

Maximum Value of N3101

Data_In_PCU

20

20

20

Release Delay of Downlink TBF(ms)

Data_In_PCU

2400

2400

2400

Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF(ms)

Data_In_PCU

2000

2000

2000

Release Delay of Nonextended Uplink TBF(ms)

Data_In_PCU

120

120

120

Load Reselect Level Threshold

Data_In_PCU

40

40

40

GPRS Quality Threshold

Data_In_PCU

EDGE 8PSK Quality Threshold

Data_In_PCU

16

16

16

EDGE GMSK Quality Threshold

Data_In_PCU

Cell Reselect Interval(s)

Data_In_PCU

Normal Cell Reselection Worsen Level Threshold

Data_In_PCU

Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Cell Normal Reselection Allowed

Data_In_PCU

Permit

Permit

Permit

Cell Load Reselection Allowed

Data_In_PCU

Permit

Permit

Permit

Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed

Data_In_PCU

Permit

Permit

Permit

2G/3G Cell Reselection Strategy

Data_In_PCU

Preference for 2G Cell

Preference for 2G Cell

Preference for 2G Cell

Filter Window Size

Data_In_PCU

Allowed Measure Report Missed Number

Data_In_PCU

Load Reselection Receive Threshold(%)

Data_In_PCU

60

60

60

Load Reselection Start Threshold(%)

Data_In_PCU

85

85

85

MS Rx Quality Worsen Ratio Threshold(%)

Data_In_PCU

30

30

30

MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold

Data_In_PCU

200

200

200

Cell Penalty Last Time(s)

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Cell Penalty Level

Data_In_PCU

30

30

30

Cell Reselection Hysterisis

Data_In_PCU

Min Access Level Threshold

Data_In_PCU

15

15

15

Support QoS Optimize

Data_In_PCU

Not Support

Not Support

Not Support

PS Concentric Cell HO Strategy

Data_In_PCU

No handover No handover No handover between between underlaid between underlaid underlaid subcell subcell and overlaid subcell and and overlaid subcell overlaid subcell subcell

Transmission Delay of POC Service

Data_In_PCU

650

650

650

Max. GBR for POC Service

Data_In_PCU

16

16

16

Min. GBR for POC Service

Data_In_PCU

Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS

Data_In_PCU

Not Support

Not Support

Not Support

Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS

Data_In_PCU

Not Support

Not Support

Not Support

Support Gbr QoS

Data_In_PCU

Not Support

Not Support

Not Support

Downlink Default MCS Type

Data_In_PCU

MCS6

MCS6

MCS6

Downlink Fixed MCS Type

Data_In_PCU

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

Uplink Default MCS Type

Data_In_PCU

MCS2

MCS2

MCS2

Uplink Fixed MCS Type

Data_In_PCU

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

BEP Period

Data_In_PCU

Link Quality Control Mode

Data_In_PCU

LA

LA

LA

Down TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3

Data_In_PCU

Down TBF threshold From CS3 to CS2

Data_In_PCU

Down TBF threshold From CS2 to CS1

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Down TBF threshold From CS3 to CS4

Data_In_PCU

Down TBF threshold From CS2 to CS3

Data_In_PCU

Down TBF threshold From CS1 to CS2

Data_In_PCU

Downlink Default CS Type

Data_In_PCU

CS2

CS2

CS2

Downlink Fixed CS Type

Data_In_PCU

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

Up TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3

Data_In_PCU

Up TBF threshold From CS3 to CS2

Data_In_PCU

Up TBF threshold From CS2 to CS1

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Up TBF threshold From CS3 to CS4

Data_In_PCU

Up TBF threshold From CS2 to CS3

Data_In_PCU

Up TBF threshold From CS1 to CS2

Data_In_PCU

Uplink Default CS Type

Data_In_PCU

CS1

CS1

CS1

Uplink Fixed CS Type

Data_In_PCU

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

Background Service Priority Weight

Data_In_PCU

THP3 Priority Weight

Data_In_PCU

THP2 Priority Weight

Data_In_PCU

THP1 Priority Weight

Data_In_PCU

ARP3 Priority Weight

Data_In_PCU

ARP2 Priority Weight

Data_In_PCU

ARP1 Priority Weight

Data_In_PCU

Timer of Releasing Abis Timeslot

Data_In_PCU

15

15

15

Reservation Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion

Data_In_PCU

Level of Preempting Dynamic Channel

Data_In_PCU

All dynamic channels can be pre-empted

All dynamic channels can be pre-empted

All dynamic channels can be preempted.

Timer of Releasing Idle Dynamic Channel

Data_In_PCU

20

20

20

Dynamic Channel Conversion Parameter of Concentric Cell

Data_In_PCU

Only convert at UL

Only convert at UL

only convert dynamic channel at UL

PDCH Downlink Multiplex Threshold

Data_In_PCU

80

80

80

PDCH Uplink Multiplex Threshold

Data_In_PCU

70

70

70

Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion

Data_In_PCU

20

20

20

Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion

Data_In_PCU

20

20

20

Maximum Ratio Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell

Data_In_PCU

30

30

30

MultiBand reporting

Data_In_PCU

Report the frequencies of six strongest cells

Report the frequencies of six strongest cells

Report the frequencies of six strongest cells

Threshold of HCS Signal Strength

Data_In_PCU

-110dB

-110dB

-110dB

Cell HCS Prior Class

Data_In_PCU

Maximum TX Power for Access PCH

Data_In_PCU

Minimum Receiving level for Access

Data_In_PCU

Exclusive Access

Data_In_PCU

Not Exclusive

Not Exclusive

Not Exclusive

Cell Access Bar Switch

Data_In_PCU

Permit Cell Access

Permit Cell Access

Permit Cell Access

Accessorial Hysteresis of Cell Selection In New Routing Area

Data_In_PCU

2dB

2dB

2dB

Cell Reselection Forbidden Time

Data_In_PCU

10sec

10sec

10sec

Allow MS to Access to another Cell

Data_In_PCU

Yes

Yes

Yes

Exceptional Rule for GPRS Reselect Offset

Data_In_PCU

GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis Applied to C31 Criterion or not

Data_In_PCU

c31standard

c31standard

c31standard

GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis

Data_In_PCU

2dB

2dB

2dB

Support PSI Status Message

Data_In_PCU

No

No

No

Allow MR Command or not

Data_In_PCU

No

No

No

PSI1 Repetition Period

Data_In_PCU

Persistence Level 4

Data_In_PCU

16

16

16

Persistence Level 3

Data_In_PCU

14

14

14

Persistence Level 2

Data_In_PCU

13

13

13

Persistence Level 1

Data_In_PCU

12

12

12

Extension Transmission Timeslots of Random Access Minimum Timeslots between Two Successive Channel Requests Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 4

Data_In_PCU

20

20

20

Data_In_PCU

20

20

20

Data_In_PCU

Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 3

Data_In_PCU

Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 2

Data_In_PCU

Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 1

Data_In_PCU

Access Control Class

Data_In_PCU

PRACH Blocks

Data_In_PCU

PAGCH Blocks

Data_In_PCU

PBCCH Blocks

Data_In_PCU

Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Transfer Mode

Data_In_PCU

0.96sec

0.96sec

0.96sec

Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Idle Mode

Data_In_PCU

15.36sec

15.36sec

15.36sec

Non-DRX Period

Data_In_PCU

0.24sec

0.24sec

0.24sec

GPRS Reselection Offset

Data_In_PCU

-2db

-2db

-2dB

GPRS Penalty Time

Data_In_PCU

10sec

10sec

10sec

GPRS Temporary Offset

Data_In_PCU

10dB

10dB

10dB

Extension MR Period

Data_In_PCU

60sec

60sec

60sec

Extension MR Type

Data_In_PCU

type1

type1

type1

Interference Frequency

Data_In_PCU

NCC_PERMITTED

Data_In_PCU

Extension Measurement Command

Data_In_PCU

em0

em0

em0

BSS Paging Coordination

Data_In_PCU

Yes

Yes

Yes

Support 11BIT EGPRS Access

Data_In_PCU

Yes

Yes

Yes

Routing Area Color Code

Data_In_PCU

Packet Access Priority

Data_In_PCU

Packet access of level 4

Packet access of level 4

Packet access of level 4

Support SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on CCCH

Data_In_PCU

No

No

No

Network Control Mode

Data_In_PCU

nc0

nc0

nc0

Pan Max.

Data_In_PCU

12

12

12

Pan Increment

Data_In_PCU

Pan Decrement

Data_In_PCU

BS_CV_MAX

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Control Acknowledge Type

Data_In_PCU

Four access pulses by default

Four access pulses Four access pulses by default by default

Access Burst Type

Data_In_PCU

8bit

8bit

8bit

Max. Duration of DRX(s)

Data_In_PCU

4s

T3192

Data_In_PCU

500ms

500ms

500ms

T3168

Data_In_PCU

500ms

500ms

500ms

Network Operation Mode

Data_In_PCU

Network Network Operation Network Operation Operation Mode Mode II Mode II II

Description

This parameter specifies the layer where a cell is located. The network designed by Huawei has four layers: Pico, Micro, Macro, and Umbrella, numbered 1-4 respectively. The Pico layer is a microcell layer on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands. It m

This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China is 460.

This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC).

This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom operator. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique nationwide. The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).

This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.

This parameter specifies the handover between the cells at the same layer. If this parameter is set to a small value, the priority is high. Generally, the cells at the same layer have the same priority. For details, refer to Layer of the Cell. This parameter specifies the activation status of a cell. The activation status can be Not Activated or Activated.

This parameter specifies the number of the PCU that is connected to the E1 link on the Pb interface.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU) must be configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus

The parameter specifies whether the PCU supports baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with GSM, EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which improv This parameter specifies the power attenuation level of a timeslot when 8PSK is used by an EDGE-enabled TRX. The attenuation value has 50 levels. Each level attenuates by 0.2 dB. The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits This parameter specifies whether the cell support the Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) function. In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet transmission mode, the network informs the MS of the system information about neighb This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the PACKET SI STATUS procedure. When the cell is configured with the PBCCH, the MS sends the Packet PSI/SI Status message to the BSC, indicating that the MS has stored the system message. The BSC sends th This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Network Control 2 (NC2) function. In NC2, the MS reports the measurement report of the reference cell and neighbor cells to the BSC. The BSC controls cell reselection (including normal reselections a This parameter specifies whether the PCU supports 64 neighbor cells. In the NACC and NC2 functions, this parameter affects the ability of the BSC to report the number of neighbor cells. For the BTS3002C, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+,BTS22C and BTS20, the default value is Invalid and cannot be manually modified. That is, the main and diversity level cannot be reported. For other types of BTSs, the default value is Support and can be manually modif This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected, it cannot be changed. GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band. DCS1800: The cell This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state performs location management based on the routing area. Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message. For example, value 0 indic This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) function. The DTM function enables an MS to provide both the CS service and the PS service at the same time. The function requires the support of the BSC.

This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the enhanced DTM function. Compared with the DTM function, the enhanced DTM function enhances the CS setup and release. When the CS service is set up, the PS service is not disrupted.

This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side. The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A

This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen

This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.

This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement the extended cell. A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay. Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120 This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function. In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t This parameter specifies whether the enhanced concentric cell handover is allowed in a concentric cell. If the cell supports the enhanced concentric cell function, compare the receive level of the MS with OtoU HO Received Level Threshold and with UtoO HO This parameter specifies whether a cell is a normal cell or a concentric cell. TRXs in a concentric cell differ in coverage; thus, two subcells with different radiuses form a concentric cell. Due to the difference in coverage, the OL subcell and the UL

This parameter specifies whether a cell is the OL subcell or the UL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. This parameter specifies whether the main BCCH is configured in the OL subcell or the UL subcell. In the scenario of the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell, this parameter is set to Underlaid Subcell. In This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is n

This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs (includi

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed.

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed..

This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.

This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.

This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS. The following two points should be paid attention to: 1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX numbers may be discontinuous. 2. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board, one-to-one mapping between them is not mandatory. Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047. Internal 2G cells: 0-2047 External 2G cells: 2048-5047 External 3G cells: 5048-8047

This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a BSC.

This parameter is used to differentiate boards with unique identifiers in the BTS.

This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.

This parameter specifies the Abis mode of OML. The default value is calculated automatically, that is, the BSC assigns the Abis time slot of OML automatically.

This parameter specifies the number of a cabinet.

This parameter specifies the number of a subrack.

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where a board is located.

This parameter specifies the terminal equipment identifier on the link layer. This parameter is used to identify multiple signaling links on the same physical link when the LAPDs are multiplexed on the highway timeslot.

This parameter specifies the number of the TC subrack where the GEIUT/GOIUT is located.

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GEIUT or GOIUT is located in the TC subrack, which is connected to the local subrack. This parameter specifies the out-BSC port number on the interface board used by the semi-permanent link. When the semi-permanent link is configured on the electrical interface board, each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 31. When the semi-permanent link is configured on the optical interface board, each optical This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC timeslot occupied by the E1 port interface Abis interface. over the board is configured with 63 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 62. The bandwidth of each E1 is divided into 32 timeslots. Generally, timeslot 0 is used for synchronization and cannot be otherwise used. The E1 timeslot is numbered by 8 kbit/s, and the range is 0-255.For example, 0-3 specifies the first to the fourth 8 kbit/s sub-timeslot of the first 64 kbit/s timeslot. Accordingly, the timeslot numbering is likewise.

If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.

If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the timeslot occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.

This parameter specifies the logical link number of the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) in the BSC. When the BTS works in ring topology, the forward and reverse links share one number. Each LAPD link is uniquely numbered in one BSC. This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. The FH can realize average interference and This parameter specifies the transmit power level of the TRX. The greater this frequency diversity. parameter is, the smaller the transmit power is. When this parameter is set to 0, the transmit power level of the TRX is the greatest. Each time this parameter increases by one level, the transmit power reduces by 2 dB. For different types of BTSs, the value range of this parameter is different. BTS3X: 0-10 BTS3001C: 0-13 BTS3002C: 0-10 Double-transceiver BTSs (BTS3012BTS3012AEBTS3006C): 0-10 DBS3900 GSM, specifies GSM, BTS3900A supported This parameter BTS3900 the power levels GSM0-10by a TRX. The macro BTS and the mini BTS support different power levels.

This parameter specifies the concentric attribute of a cell. For a concentric cell, this parameter is set to UL subcell or OL subcell according to actual conditions; if the cell is not a concentric one, this parameter is set to None by default.

This parameter specifies the TRX priority. It is used for Huawei II channel assignment algorithm.

This parameter specifies whether to turn off the power amplifier of the TRX automatically for saving power when the BTS is powered by batteries after the external This parameter specifies whether a cell can convert full rate channels to half rate power supply is cut off. half rate channels to full rate channels. channels, or convert the If this parameter is set to Yes, the conversion is allowed; if the parameter is set to No, the conversion is not allowed. the TCHF that has been converted to the TCHH will be forcedly restored; the TCHH that has been converted to the TCHF will be forcedly restored. This parameter also specifies whether the channel supports the dynamic adjustment priority in the channel assignment algorithm. In the channel assignment, the channels on the TRX not supporting the dynamic adjustment are assigned first, to ensure the This parameter specifies the power attenuation levels of the EDGE for dynamicare 50 channels on the TRX supporting the dynamic adjustment are used TRX. There levels, and the attenuation between levels is 0.2 dB. adjustment. Thus, the access requests of users are satisfied. The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits GMSK signals. Thus, this parameter needs to be set to meet the frequency requirements.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the wireless link alarm parameter to the BTS. If the parameter is set to Yes, the wireless link alarm parameter is sent; otherwise, the wireless link alarm parameter is not sent. This parameter specifies the statistics base of a sub-channel (the statistical times that a sub-channel that is activated). B (the statistics base of a sub-channel on a timeslot) x N (the number of sub-channels on a timeslot) = S (the total times that channels on a timeslot that are activated). For the latest S times of channel activation, if the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds Abnormal Warn Threshold, an alarm is generated. If the percentage of abnormally released channels is less than or equal to Abnormal Release Threshold, the BSC sends the corresponding recovery alarm. If the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds the total successful channel activation threshold of a timeslot, an abnormally release alarm is generated.

If the percentage of abnormally released channel in the total successful channel activation is less than or equal to this threshold, an abnormal release clear alarm is sent.

If the duration of continuous (not accumulated) no-traffic reaches this threshold, the notraffic alarm is generated.

This parameter specifies whether a critical wireless link alarm is sent. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS sends a critical wireless link alarm if the wireless link prompt alarm is not cleared during the period specified by WLA Prompting Recover Period. If the radio link prompt alarm is cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the corresponding recovery alarm is sent by the BTS. If the radio link prompt alarm is not cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the critical wireless link alarm is sent or not sent according to the settings of the parameter Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit. The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each day. Starting from the period specified by this parameter, the BTS detects the wireless link alarm, and sends an alarm related.

The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each day. Until the end of the period specified by this parameter, the BTS stops detecting the wireless link alarm and sending the alarm related. The detection starts again until the next Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour). This parameter specifies the basic difference value caused by the specified level

difference between the uplink channel and the downlink channel. Together with Up Down Balance Floating Range, this parameter is used to calculate the number of uplink and downlink unbalance. Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power This parameter specifies the permissible uplink and downlink the uplink and the control compensation is greater than 8+30 or less than 8-30, balance floating range relative to Up Down Balance Basic Difference. The uplink and downlink is not downlink are not balanced; otherwise, the uplink and downlink are balanced. balanced only when the uplink and downlink level exceeds the Up Down Balance Floating Range. Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power control compensation is greater than 8+30 or less than 8-30, the uplink and the downlink are not balanced; otherwise, the uplink and downlink are balanced. When the percentage of the uplink-and-downlink balance measurement reports in the total valid measurement reports is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, the uplink and downlink unbalance alarm is generated. This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU. The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four Diversity Receiver, or Main Diversity. This parameter specifies the RF transmit mode of the TRX. The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do not Technology, The RF transmit mode can be Not Support, No Combining, Power Booster support Main Diversity. Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY, DPBT, or Transmitter Wide Band The DBS3900 GSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main Independent or Combining. Diversity. The BTS3006C and BTS3002E support No Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT. The DBS3900 GSM GRRU supports No Combining, Diversity Transmitter and DDIVERSITY. The BTS3900 GSM and BTS3900A GSM support No Combining, Power Booster Technology, Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT. The BTS3012 supports No Combining, Power Booster Technology, Power Booster This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power Technology, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT. amplifier not TRX based on the not support the The BTSs of a included above dotraffic volume. RF tranmsit modes listed above.

This parameter specifies the following: When the antenna hopping function is used, the signals of one TRX can switch between different antennas instead of one TRX corresponding to one antenna. Therefore, the signals on certain frequencies are less affected by Rayleigh fading following: Currently, when the BSC performs the static This parameter specifies thecompared with those without antenna hopping. The Antenna Hopping Indexon the TRX, the step ofnumber. power control corresponds to a TRX increasing or reducing the power of the TRX is 2 dB. In some scenarios, the TRX has different losses if it is combined on different tributaries, and the output power difference before and after the combination is not an integral multiple of 2 dB. Thus, the cabinet top output power of the BTS cannot be This parameter specifies whether the TRX supports antenna hopping. adjusted in the step of 2 dB, so the TRX output power may be different from the cabinet In a GSM cell, the frequency, top output power of the BTS. frame number, system information, and paging group are transmittedthroughBCCH of the of thisBCCH TRX. Ifathe MS is in an be provided for Therefore, on the the setting main parameter, finer step can unfavorable position or the antenna for the main BCCH TRX of the BTS. adjusting the cabinet top output power is faulty, then the MS cannot receive the broadcast control messages from the main BCCH TRX properly. The antenna hopping function enables the data on all the timeslots of the BCCH TRX to be transmitted on the antennas of all the TRXs in the cell in turn. Thus the quality of the BCCH TRX data received by the MS is improved and the network performance is This parameter the double-transceiver the can be configured the the interface board enhanced. Only specifies the number of BTS out-BSC slot wherewith BSCantenna hopping is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the slot that function. holds the interface board, which connects the BTS to the BSC. This parameter can be modified according to the actual requirements. However, it must This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC port where the board. be set to the number of the slot that is configured with the interfaceBSC interface board is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the port on the interface board that connects the BTS to the BSC. When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the electrical interface board, each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 31. When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the optical interface board, each optical interface board is configured with 63 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 62. If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the RSL timeslot on the GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB port.

If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.

If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the timeslot occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.

This parameter specifies the transmission bearer mode of a TRX: 0-TDM, 1-HDLC, 2HDLC_HUB, or 3-IP.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a TRX.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Abis timeslots occupied by the PDCHs on a TRX.

This parameter specifies the number of the TRX that supports the PBT together with the current TRX. When this parameter is set to the default value 255, you can infer that no TRX supports the PBT together with the current TRX.

This parameter specifies the index of the in-BTS HDLC channel. The in-BTS HDLC channel connects to the BTS TMU.

This parameter specifies the index of an HDLC channel between the PEU and the PTU.

This parameter specifies the unique number of a TRX in the HUB domain in HUB HDLC transmission mode.

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GXPUM (processing the RSL signaling) is located.

This parameter specifies the priority of the clock reference source.

This parameter specifies the HDLC channel index of reverse link in an HDLC ring network.

This parameter specifies the allowed power difference between the maximum output power of the QTRU and the maximum nominal output power.

This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.

This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell. This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side. The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A5/4, A5/5, A5/6, and A5/7 encryption algorithms respectively. If a bit is set to 1, you can infer that the BSS supports the corresponding encryption algorithm. If a bit is 0, you can infer that the BSS does not support the corresponding encryption algorithm. The eights bits cannot be all zeros and the least significant bit must be 1. This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed..

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the BTS and the network layout. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks on.

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08. This parameter specifies: for the channel assignment, suppose the MS supports multiple sub frequency bands of the 900 MHz frequency band. The BSC ignores the priority of PGSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands if the cell load is smaller than and equal to this threshold. The BSC assigns channels on the TRXs with priority of R-GSM, E-GSM, P-GSM frequency bands if the cell load is greater than this threshold. That is, the BSC preferentially assigns channels on the R-GSM TRXs if the MS supports P-GSM/E-GSM/RGSM sub frequency bands and the cell is configured with on the QTRU: This parameter determines when the channel is assigned TRXs operating on the PGSM/E-GSM/R-GSMis assigned on the QTRU board by using the dynamic power sharing When the channel sub frequency bands. algorithm, and when the remaining power of QTRU board is less than the call required power of cell, If this switch is set to Yes, this is allowed to assign the channel; otherwise, this is not allowed to assign the channel. The value of this parameter should be added in estimated power when the downlink path loss is estimated by the uplink path loss.

This parameter specifies the downlink signal strength estimated by the QTRU power sharing algorithm together with downlink power control target threshold.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

The P/N criterion determines whether the statistics time of QTRU downlink power is insufficient. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. This parameter specifies the following definitions: 1. The QTRU power sharing algorithm is disabled. The P/N criterion determines whether the observation time of QTRU downlink power is 2. Static power sharing algorithm. insufficient. power sharing algorithm. 3. Dynamic This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. The difference between static power sharing algorithm and dynamic power sharing algorithm is that the dynamic power sharing algorithm uses the MCPA power sharing technology, the static power specification is different from dynamic power specification. When there are several carriers, the maximum output power of single carrier in dynamic power specification is greater. In the network swapping, the static/dynamic power on the top of cabinet needs to If the uplink received level difference ofthe top of cabinet.timeslot exceeds the the top compare with the competitor power on calls in the same If the static power on Threshold the difference between uplink received the static situation must be of cabinet of competitor power on the top of cabinet, levels, the power sharing algorithm recorded. During the observation of top of cabinet competitor power on the the call is used; if the dynamic power on theP seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds,top of with the staticuplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another cabinet lowest power on the top of cabinet, the dynamic power sharing algorithm is timeslot. used. If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, the call with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot. The value is 0-1 in fact; however, the data in the host and BSC should be simultaneously multiplied by 10specifies the QTRU signal merge algorithm, that is, the BSC monitors the This parameter times to prevent the floating-point values. high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5 second. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot the lowest uplink signal strength of this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, a forced handover is initiated on the calls with the highest uplink signal strength in the timeslot, and the calls should be handed over to another timeslot. P specifies the Observed time of uplink received level difference, and N specifies the Duration of uplink received level difference.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC is allowed to assign the half-rate channels and full-rate channels to the MS according to the channel seizure ratio of the underlaid subcell and overlaid subcell. The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, halfrate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned. Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. This parameter is valid for the concentric The When the Allow Rate in the overlaid on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load If the cell. BSC assigns channels Selection Basedsubcell to the MS in a concentric cell.is set to channel TCH Traffic Busy Threshold (%) greater than the value of this Yes, the seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is invalid for the concentric cell. parameter, halfrate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned. Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. This parameter is valid for the concentric cell. When the Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load is set to Yes, the TCH Traffic Busy be used. This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to Threshold (%) is invalidthe frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, When for the concentric cell. this parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced. Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured. This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO. In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference among channels occur. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially. In the case of aggressive frequency reuse, the recommended value is set to Yes. This parameter specifies the static Abis resource load threshold. When the static Abis resource load is lower than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%), the full-rate channel is preferentially assigned. Otherwise, the full-rate or half-rate channel is preferred according to the dynamic Abis resource load. When the static Abis resource load is higher than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%) and the dynamic Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%), the half-rate channel is preferred. Otherwise, the full-rate channel is preferred. This parameter specifies when the BSC fails to convert the dynamic PDCH back to the TCH, this operation is not performed during the period specified by this parameter. The parameter is valid for both built-in decided external PCU. The channel type to be assigned is PCH and according to the channel types that are

allowed by the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell. During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required in the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell is greater than the value of AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. In other cases, the TCHFspecifies whether thechannels are required. assigned on the basis of This parameter or TCCH, TCHF Prior TCH/H is preferentially For details type cell load levels, refer to the seizure ratio that are the channelaboutand current service channel Cell Load Threshold. allowed by the MSC. Relevant algorithm: AMR call channel assignment TCHH Prior During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH,algorithms channels are required in

the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by The updating of the history record starts set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is when the Update Period of CH Record times out. Update Freq of CH Record is subtracted from the history priority of eachIn other to in the cell is greater than the value of AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. channel improve the priority of the channel. cases, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHF Prior channels are required. Principles of taking values are as follows: When the Update Period of CH Record expires, the process of updating the history Generally, set this parameter to 2. record of channel occupancy is started. That is, the history priority of each channel is If a fixed interference source Record an equipment fault setting value of this reduced by Update Freq.of CHexists orat the interval of theoccurs, the update frequency for the affected cells can be set to 4 or 6. parameter to increase the channel priority. The Update Period of CH are as follows: Principles of taking valuesRecord is used together with Update Freq of CH Record, In this way, the channel can be assigned even ifis used. For example,is continuously lowered Generally, a high-frequency adjustment the channel priority the update period should within a periodaof time. it ranges from half an hour to one hour because several busy be set in such way that hours are the major concerns during the actual operation in a day. If the parameter is set to a too small value, the result of the history record is meaningless. If the parameter is set to a too great value, the result cannot be seen inreports that are used to This parameter specifies the number of measurement time during busy hours. If a fixed the signal quality on signaling equipment determineinterference source exists or anchannels. fault occurs, the update period for the signal quality on be set in such a way that not be determined based on only one The affected cells cansignaling channels should it ranges from several hours to one day. This parameter is used eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain measurement result. To together with Update Freq. of CH Record so that the channel can average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of the be assigned even if the history record priority decreases. signaling channels, and then determine the signal quality on signaling channels.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to clculate the signal quality on speech/data TCHs. The signal quality on TCHs should not be determined based on only one measurement result. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain the average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of TCHs, and then determine the signal quality on speech/data TCHs. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength. This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink interference is existed. The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower the signal quality is. If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level This parameter specifies one of of thresholds to determine whether the to the value Threshold and the quality gradethethe uplink channel is greater or equal downlink interference is existed. Interf of DL Qual Threshold. The downlink interference occurs. The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower the signal quality is. If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink Interf of DL Qual Threshold. The downlink interference occurs. interference is existed. 0-63 corresponds to the range of -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The value range of Rank The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the quality is. If the uplink channel level is of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink This parameter specifies one greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value interference is existed. Interf of UL the level, the greateruplink interference occurs. The higher Qual Threshold. The the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the

quality is. If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value Interf of UL Qual Threshold.this indicates the signal is good, but the quality is poor, that This parameter specifies whether the history record priority is considered in channel is, the uplink interference occurs. assignment. The value range of Rank 0-63 corresponds to the range of -110 dBm to -47 dBm. If this parameter is set to YES, the history record priority is effective. If this parameter is set to NO, the history record priority is ineffective. Usually this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high history record priority preferentially. This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel

assignment. If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set to NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective. Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority This parameter preferentially. specifies whether the channel interference is considered in channel assignment. If this parameter is set to NO, the channel interference measurement is not performed and the interference indication is not sent. If this parameter is set to YES, the channel interference measurement is performed. If this parameter is set to YES, the channel with little interference is selected preferentially. This parameter specifies whether the interference priority is considered during channel assignment. By default, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with little interference.

In Huawei II channel assignment algorithm, if the current channel seizure ratio reaches or exceeds this value, the half-rate TCH is assigned preferentially; otherwise, the fullrate TCH is assigned preferentially. This parameter specifies whether to turn on the switch for the tight BCCH algorithm, and thus controls whether to enable the BCCH aggressive frequency reuse algorithm. Yes: Open No: Close

This parameter specifiespriority ofthe current cell supports the dynamic These types This parameter sets the whether different types in channel allocation. transmission diversity include: or dynamic PBT: 0: not supported Capacity with a higher priority 1: dynamic transmission diversity supported Quality with a higher priority 2: coordination with a relatively higher priority PS dynamic PBT supported

PS coordination with an absolutely higher priority The priority of different types is as follows: Priority by capacity: capacity factors > quality factors > PS cooperation factors > management factors Priority by quality: quality factors > capacity factors two cooperation factors > This parameter specifies whether the combination of > PShalf-rate TCHs into one fullmanagement factors a cell. rate TCH is allowed in Relative priority is PS domain: capacity factors > PS cooperation factors > quality If this parameter byset to No, the forced handover and call delay caused by timeslot factors > management factors arrangement can be avoided, but there may cause some TCHF-only calls to fail because Absolute priority by PS domain: PS cooperation factors > capacity factors > quality the timeslot arrangement is unavailable. factorsparameter is set factors calls may failfor thethe timeslot a TCH from an SDCCH. This parameter specifies the minimum time when recovery of arrangement fails and If this > management to Yes, The processing for not select the TCHF in to the TCH is as follows: each cell is configured when the MS does the SDCCH recovered the concentric cell. with a counter. Each time the TCH is converted to the SDCCH, the counter is set to ResTime. The value of the counter is adjusted every three seconds. If the number of idle SDCCHs > 8 + N1, the counter descreases by 3; if the number of idle SDCCHs < 8 + Idle SDCCH Threshold N1, the counter increases by 12 within the setting value; if the number of idle SDCCHs = 8 + N1, the counter remains unchanged. If the value of the counter is BSC determines whetherafter adjustment, the SDCCH is the TCH to to the TCH. When the equal to or lower than 0 to initiate the conversion from converted the SDCCH, it needs to determine whether the number of SDCCHs after the conversion exceeds the Cell idle SDCCHs in the cell is smaller than or equal to the exceeds the value If the number of SDCCH Channel Maximum. If the number of SDCCHs value of this of this parameter, the BSC does a TCHF thatthe conversion. parameter, the BSC tries to find not initiate can be converted to the SDCCH. This parameter specifies one of the conditions for converting the TCHF to the SDCCH. Besides this parameter, the other three conditions for initiating the conversion from TCHFs to SDCCHs are as follows: 1.The cell allows the SDCCH dynamic adjustment. 2.(Number of idle TCHFs + number of idle TCHHs/2) 4 or the number of TRXs in the cell, and the cell must have at least one idle TCHF. 3.The sum of the numberthe SDCCHsrate adopted oneight is smaller thanwhen a call is This parameter specifies of coding in the cell plus a half-rate channel the maximum numberestablished.allowed in the cell. most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have initially of SDCCHs Since there are at

four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in the ACS respectively. call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust Based on the RQI in the the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate

adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is 1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding rate. The value of this parameter has five bits. This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a full-rate channel when a call is initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in the ACS respectively. call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust Based on the RQI in the the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate

adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is 1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding rate. The value of this parameter has eight bits. This parameter specifies the maximum receivingof reassignmentsfailurethe assignment In normal assignment procedure, after number the assignment after message from on the Um the SDCCH, the BSC does not report the message to the MSC immediately. the MS on interface fails.

Instead, the BSC re-assigns radio channels and re-originates the assignment on the Um interface. Thus the success rate of assignment can be increased. Reassigning radio channels can be performed in the carriers with the same frequency band or of different frequency bands. If this parameter is set to Same Band, the frequency band of the preferentially reassigned channel is the same as what is used before the reassignment. If the parameter is set to Different Band, the frequency band of the preferentially reassigned channel is different from what is used before the reassignment. This parameter specifies whether to disabledeterioration of point-to-point short You can set this parameter to improve the the sending of QoS caused by the messages. In specific cells, sending point-to-point short interference, carrier channel fault, or engineering fault. messages on the downlink is disabled to ensure sufficient radio channels for calls.

The channel activation and immediate assignment commands are sent at the same time to accelerate the signaling processing rate, thus improving the response speed of the network. This parameter specifies whether to enable the Abis resource adjustment TCHH function. This parameter determines whether the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to an MS when the Abis resources are insufficient. When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to the MS if the Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%) or than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%).

This parameter specifies whether to allow the enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption (eMLPP) function. In eMLPP, the network can use different policies such as queuing, preemption, and directed retry based on the priorities of different calls when network resources are occupied. If the Allow EMLPP is set to Yes, when preemption occurs, the MS with the lowest priority performs handover, and the MS with higher priority seizes the idle channel after handover. If the Allow EMLPP is set to No, a certain MS with lower priority releases the channel, the MS with higher priority seizes the idle channel after release. This parameter specifies whether to allow the reassignment function. This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a TDD cell is valid. The measurement report is valid if the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter. After the valid measurement report is filtered, the TDD cell joins in the cell prioritization. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a TDD cell. ... Add the value of this parameter to the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement 6: 36 dB report, and then sequence the TDD cells. 7: dB 0: 0 1: 6 dB ... 7: 42 dB This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN TDD cells that should be contained in the best cell list or in the measurement report. A TDD cell can become a candidate cell only when the average receive level of the TDD cell is greater than the TDD Cell Reselect Diversity of the serving cell. 0: - (always select a cell if acceptable) 1: -28 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about an FDD 2: -24 dB cell is valid. ...the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of If 15: 28 dB this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the valid measurement report is filtered, the 3G cell joins in the cell priority sequence. 0: 0 dB This parameter specifies the signal level offset of an FDD cell. 1: 6 dB When the priority of a 3G cell is sequenced, it is recommended that the value of this ... parameter 6: 36 dB be added to the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report. 0: 0 7: dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a

DCS1800 cell is valid. ...the receive level of the 1800 MHz cell in the measurement report is greater than the If 7: 42 dB this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement report value of is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority sequence. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This ... parameter specifies the signal level offset of a DCS1800 cell. WhendB 6: 36 sequencing the priority of a DCS1800 cell based on its frequency band, the value of 7: this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report. 0: 0 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a GSM900 1: 6 dB cell is valid. ... When the 7: 42 dB receive level of the GSM900 cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement report is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority rank. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in ... parameter specifies the signal level offset of a GSM900 cell. connection mode. This WhendB priority of a GSM900 cell is sequenced on the basis of its frequency band, 15], 6: connection mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, the In 36 the value of this to search should be added to the receive level in the measurement report. 7: MS startsparameter for 3G cells. the 0: 0example: For dB 1: 6 dB If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the ... MS starts to search for 3G cells. 7:this dB If 42 parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is higher than 10, the MS starts to search for 3G cells. 0: -98 dBm 1: -94 dBm ... 6: -74 dBm 7: (always) 8: -78 dBm 9: -74 dBm ... 14: -54 dBm 15: (never)

This parameter indicates that when the MS reports the EMR, it adds the value of this parameter to the received signal level, and then converts the result into the RXLEV value. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08. If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 10 dBm, level values 0-63 map with -100 dBm to -37 dBm. If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 0 dBm, level values 0-63 map with -110 dBm to -47 dBm. If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is Automatic, the MS chooses the least SCALE while ensuring that the MS can report the most strong level. This parameter specifies whether the EMR can contain the information about a cell with an invalid BSIC. This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in packet transfer mode. In packet transfer mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15], the MS starts to search for 3G cells. is allowed to search for a 3G cell when the This parameter specifies whether the MS For example: BSIC must be decoded. If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the MS starts to search for 3G cells. If this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is higher than 10, the MS starts to search for 3G cells. This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for 3G cell reselection. 0: -98 dBm Only when the receive level of a 3G cell is greater than FDD Qmin, the 3G cell can be 1: -94 dBm one ... candidate cell for cell reselection. 0: -20 dB 6: -74 dBm 1: -6 dB 7: (always) 2: -18 dB 8: -78 dBm 3: -8 dB 9: -74 dBm 4: -16 dB ... 5: -10 dB 14: -54 dBm 6: -14 dB 15: (never) 7: -12 dB. This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN FDD cells that should be contained in the Default value: in dB. best cell list or -20the measurement report.

This parameter specifies the measurement report counter of an FDD cell. Only when the average receive level of a 3G cell is FDD Q Offset greater than that of the serving cell, the 3G cell becomes a candidate cell. 0: -parameter specifies theacceptable) This (always select a cell if level threshold for cell reselection in idle mode. 1: idle dB In -28 mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15], the MS 2: -24 to search for 3G cells. starts dB example: For 15: 28parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the If this dB MS starts to search for 3G cells. This parameter specifies the and if the of the signal level for cell reselection in than 10, If this parameter is set to 10 threshold signal level of the serving cell is higher connection mode before Qsearch C is obtained. the MS starts to search for 3G cells. 0: -98 dBm 1: -94 dBm 2: -90 dBm 3: -86 dBm 4:the system information indicates "MBR", the MS reports the number of neighbor cells If -82 dBm 5: different on -78 dBm frequency bands. 6: -74 the MS reports the number of neighbor cells on the same frequency band with the When dBm 7(always), a maximumMS the value of Serving 3G cells serving cell, that is, the of keeps searching for Band Reporting can be reported. 8: -78 neighbor cells must meet the following requirements: These dBm 9: The dBm 1. -74 receive levels of the neighbor cells must be higher than 900 Reporting Threshold 10: -70 dBm or 1800 Reporting Threshold. 11: -66 dBm 2. The BSIC of a neighbor cell must be valid. 12: -62signals of the neighbor cells must be the strongest among all the neighbor cells dBm 3. The Power Deviation Indication is set to Yes, the transmit power of an MS is the MS When dBm 13:the same frequency band. on -58 maximum transmit power level plus the power calculated from the power deviation if 14: -54 dBm the class 3 MS that is, DCS1800 band does not for 3G cells original power command after 15(never), on the the MS does not search receive the random access. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08. The MS does not receive the original power command after random access. This parameter indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band on the basis of the maximum MS transmit power.

This parameter is used for the MS to report neighbor cell explanation of multiple bands. It is sent in the system information 2ter and 5ter. The early classmark sending control (ECSC) specifies whether the MSs in a cell use early classmark sending. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.After a successful immediate assignment, the MS sends additional classmark information to the network as early as possible. The CM3 (classmark 3) information contains the power information of each bandparameter specifies In the an MS disconnects a call if the MS must be correctly This of multi-band MSs. when inter-band handover, power class unsuccessfully described. When paging is made or the BA2 this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408 and decodes the SACCH message. For details of table is sent between different bands, the CM3 message must be known. For dual-band MSs, if ECSC is set to No, the MSC sends a 05.08. CLASSMARK REQUEST message after thethe MS, the counterIND message. Thethe initial Once a dedicated channel is assigned to MS reports an EST S is enabled and MS then reports set to this parameter value. value is the CLASSMARK UPDATE message. The connection time of the MS is affected.

Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time an SACCH message is correctly decoded, the counter S increases by 2.When the counter S is equal to 0, the downlink radio link is considered as failed.Therefore, when the voice or data quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved This parameter specifies channel handover, the connection is to be whose access or through power control or whether to allow emergency calls. For MSs re-established class is from 0 released. to 9, if this parameter is set to No, emergency calls are allowed. For MSs whose access class is from 11 to 15, emergency calls are not allowed only when the access control bit is set to 0 and allow the MSs of special access Yes. This parameter specifies whether to Emergent Call Disable is set to classes to access the network. This parameter is used for load control. Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed. For parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of common class 10 are allowed to Thisexample, 000001 indicates that users of all classes except access classes to access access the network. In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy, congestion may occur the network. This parameter is used for load control. in busy hours. Forthat access is not allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed.For Value 1 indicates example, more RACH burst occurs, the AGCH flow is overloaded, or the Abis interface flow indicates that the MSs of all classes to 1 for the 0 are allowed example, 0000000001 is overloaded.If this parameter is setexcept class MSs of some to classes, the traffic volume in this cell may be reduced. access the network.

During the BTS installation, activation, or cell maintenance test, this parameter can be set to 1. All MSs are not allowed to access the network, thus reducing the impact on installation or maintenance. This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy, congestion may occur in busy hours. For be sent by an MS in an immediate the AGCH is overloaded, example, more RACH burst occurs,assignment procedure. or the Abis interface is After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure, classes, the traffic volume in overloaded.If this parameter is set to 1 for the MSs of some it always listens to the messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH this cell may be reduced. group to which the MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate Assignment Extend messages, the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified interval. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions of the immediate assignment message. When this number is reached, the immediate assignment message is not retransmitted even if the Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) is not exceeded. Within the period specified by this parameter, the immediate assignment message is dispatched and retransmitted. Otherwise, the message is not dispatched or retransmitted.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the immediate assignment retransmission parameter to the BTS. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a fullrate channel). For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS Error SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a halfrate channel). For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SACCH. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I during the multiframe release. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter to the BTS.

This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 when the SDCCH supports SAPI3 services. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH on the SDCCH. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. For details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message services. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. For details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message services. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHH over the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHFthe Um This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SDCCH over over the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the interface. descriptions of the data link layer from deadlock during data transmission. The data link T200 prevents the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. layer transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors into a sequential non-error data link. The entities at the two ends of this data link use the acknowledgement retransmission mechanism. Each message must be confirmed by the peer end.In unknown cases, both ends are For the if a message is lost. later and the double-transceiver BTSs, occurs.Therefore, waiting BTS3X in 03.0529 orAt this time, the deadlock of the systemthis parameter specifies the level threshold for a timer. When the of the MS. If the receive level of the transmit end must establish the random access timer expires, the transmit end the RACH burst is smaller than the value of RACH Min.Access Level, then the regards this regards that the receive end does not receive the message and the BTS transmit end access as an invalid one and number of retransmissions the receive level of the RACH retransmits the message.Theno decoding is performed. Ifis determined by N200.T200 burst is N200 ensure that the of RACH Min. sequentially the BTS data and and the greater than the valuedata link layer Access Level,transmitsconsiders that an the access request free from this timeslot, and determines together with the value of transmission is exists on errors. Random Access Error Threshold whether the RACH access is valid. Generally, RACH Busy Threshold is higher than RACH Min.Access Level. Therefore, for the BTS24, RACH Min.Access correlation between training sequences. This parameter specifies the Level is shielded. For the BTS2X (excluding the BTS24), the RACH Min.Access Level parameter is invalid. According the GSM protocols, the system determines whether the received signal is the random access signal of an MS through the correlation between training sequences (41 bits) and calculates the TA value.

This parameter specifies the following rules for TRX aiding function control: TRX Aiding Not Allowed: The TRX aiding function is disabled. Allowed & Recover Forbidden: The TRX aiding is allowed but the switchback is forbidden This parameter TRX is restored. after the faulty specifies the speech version supported by the BSC. The value of this parameter has six Immediately: The TRX aiding is enabled but the switchback is Allowed & Recoverbits. The six bits (from the most significant bit to the least significant bit) indicate the performed immediately after the faulty TRX is restored. following speech versions Check Res: The TRX aiding is enabled and the switchback is Allowed & Recover When respectively: half-rate version 3, half-rate version faulty TRX version 1, full-rate version 3, full-rate not immediately performed after the2, half-rate is restored. Instead, the switchback is version 2, during the resource check in the early morning, indicate o'clock. performedand full-rate version 1. Here, versions 3, 2, and 1usually 2 AMR, EFR, and FR respectively. If a bit is 1, you can infer that the BSC supports the corresponding speech version. If a bit is 0, you can infer that the BSC does not support the corresponding speech version. For example, if the parameter is set to 001011, you can infer that full-rate versions 1-2 and half-rate version 1 are supported. In the HDLC networking the value of full-rate version 1 under the three full-rate This parameter specifies mode, if onlyRadio Link Timeoutamong half-rate AMR calls. For versions is selected, it is recommended that the AEC delay of all the DSPs in the DPUX details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)). and DPUC be set to 141 so that the downlink traffic flow is further decreased.

This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).

This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under half-rate AMR calls. For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.

This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under full-rate AMR calls. For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.

This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry. When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate target cells. When Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled is set to Yes, the directed try procedure is For the BTS3X series and conditions are met: The this parameter specifies the level started if the following twodouble-transceiver BTSs, cell supports directed try. The load threshold forgreater than or equal towhen the BTS determines Threshold.busy state. of the cell is the MS random access Cell Direct Try Forbidden the RACH When the receive level ofthe total number of paging times. The parameter and the This parameter specifies the random access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy. For the BTS3X series paging times configured on the MSC side together determine the number ofand the double-transceiver BTSs, this message. only indicates whether the timeslot is busy. The retransmissions of the pagingparameter The total paging times is approximately equal threshold setting multiplied by the paging times configured on to this parameter does not affect the normal access of the MS. the MSC side. At present, For Paging Times is set to 4 in the MSC. The this does not support the mechanism for the the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), BSC parameter specifies the level threshold for the BTS to paging message; therefore, it processes a receive level of each time it resending the determine an MS random access.When thepaging message the random access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold and the access demodulation is receives the paging message. The BTS2X, BTS3X, and double-transceiver BTS support successful, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy and determines whether the paging retransmission. RACH access is valid based on the parameter Random Access Error Threshold. For the BTS2X, the parameter RACH Busy Threshold the BSC to determineconnection failure. This parameter is used by the BTS to inform is used of radio link whether the timeslot is busy. In BTS receives the SACCH affects the normal access of the MS. The MS access When the addition, the parameter measurement report from the MS, the counter for is allowed only when the level of the MS random access burst is greater than the RACH determining whether a radio link is faulty is set to the value of this parameter. Each time Busy Threshold.decode the SACCH measurement report sent by the MS, the counter the BTS fails to For the BTS24, this parameter has two functions. One function is indicating the level decreases by 1. If the BTS successfully decodes the SACCH measurement report, the threshold of the MS random access for the system to determine the RACH busy state. counter increases by 2. When the receive levelcounter is 0, the radio link fails.The BTSgreaterathan this When the value of the of the random access burst timeslot is sends connection threshold, the BTS considers that BSC.The number of SACCH multi-framesis indicating failure indication message to the the timeslot is busy. The other function and the radio whether the MS specifies the length of MS access isthe radio only failureaccess 08.58 and This failure counter in the system message specify allowed linksee GSM Rec. level link parameter access is allowed.The timer T3150. For details, when time on the (including random the downlink respectively. The judgment standard is whether the access) 04.08. uplink and that on access and handovernumber is greater than the threshold. This value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63of Physical information retransmissions. maximum The parameter specifies the decoded. dBm to -47 When the BTS sends physical information to the(corresponding to -110timer T3105.If SACCH message maximum number is Ny1. Ifthe MS, the BTSretransmissions exceeds is correctly Assume that the number of starts the dBm). the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from the BTS sends the MS, BTS resends Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. The maximum times for After BSC a connection failure message, which can also be a handover failure message. resendingthe message, the BSCis Ny1. receiving physical information releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer T3105. During asynchronous handover, the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the BTS. Usually, the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. Upon detecting the bursts, the BTS sends a Physical information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. Meanwhile, the timer T3105 starts. The Physical information containing information about different physical layers guarantees correct MS access. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08.

This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. If both the Inter-System Handover Enable and the Better 3G Cell HO Allowed parameters are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than the TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a 3G cell.

During a measurement period, a fast handover occurs only if the difference of path loss between a chain neighbor cell and the serving cell is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. The level values 0 to 127 map with -64 dB to 63 dB.

This parameter specifies the penalty that is performed on the downlink level of the original serving cell after a successful fast handover.

This parameter specifies the duration of penalty that is performed on the original serving cell after a successful fast handover.

This parameter specifies the allowed number of invalid measurement reports when the BSC uses the measurement reports for filtering. If the number of received measurement reports is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, no filtering is performed and no fast handover decision is made. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the BSC receives the measurement reports of the adjacent cell from the BTS. This helps to avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the BSC receives the measurement reports of the serving cell from the BTS. This helps to avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report. The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion, that is, the period during which the triggering conditions of fast handover are met. Such a period is within the value defined by this parameter.

The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. That is, if the triggering conditions of fast handover is met for a period longer than or equal to the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered. During a measurement period, if the MS moves at a speed greater than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.

During a measurement period, if the compensated downlink level of the serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

During a measurement period, if the filtered uplink level of the serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

During the UL subcell to the OL subcell handover in the enhanced dualband network, if the traffic load in the OL subcell is higher than the Inner Cell Serious Overload Threshold, a load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell cannot be triggered. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding handover decision is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding handover decision is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.

After a handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell is successful, no handover can be triggered within the period defined by this parameter.

This parameter specifies the level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. In Enhanced dualband If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the UL subcell by level. This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level. This parameter specifies whether the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is enabled.

If the traffic load of the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell serious overload threshold, the handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of this parameter per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period.

This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the UL subcell general overload threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in ping-pong handovers, this the OL subcell by level. To prevent the cell are handed over toparameter should be decided before the handover This parameter specifies UL subcell. Suppose the signal strength of from the OL subcell to thethe period of load handover for each level. serving cell is SS(s)

and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). The decision condition for a This parameter is a relative value, which specifies the size of blank SS(n) < Distance handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is as follows: SS(s) - zone between the UL subcell and the OL subcell.And OL Subcells - Distance Hysterisis Between Boudaries of between Boundaries of UL The greater the value of this parameter is, the larger the blank zone is. UL And OL Subcells. For the enhanced dualband handover algorithm, the boundaries of the OL and UL subcells are determined according to the relative value between the signal strength of serving cell and that of the adjacent cell. Suppose the signal strength of serving cell is SS(s) and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). When SS(s) = SS(n), the system considers that it is the boundary point of the UL subcell. When SS(s) - SS(n) > Distance between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells, it is the coverage area of the OL subcell. control level in the current system is greater than the value of this parameter, If the flow the handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell due to low or high UL subcell load is not allowed.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Step length of UL subcell load HO(dB) per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, some calls of the UL subcell is handed over to the OL subcell. Moreover, the MS that sends the channel request message in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. This parameter specifies whether the channel request in the OL subcell is preferentially processed over the channel request the UL subcell according to the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold, the MS access to the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. This parameter specifies whether the access request in the UL subcell is preferentially processed over the access request in OL subcell according to the UL subcell general overload threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell general overload threshold, the MS access to the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. In an enhanced dualband cell, if TCH seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter, some calls of the OL subcell is handed over to the UL subcell. Moreover, the MS that sends the channel request message in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the Ec/No of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. The level values 0 to 49 map to -24 dB to 0 dB. If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a 3G cell.

This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.

This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.

This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR HR voice service. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10. This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR FR voice service. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10.

This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is higher than the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the target cell by level. This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Modified step length of UL load HO period per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, some calls in the UL subcell are handed over to the OL subcell.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter, some calls in the OL subcell are handed over to the UL subcell. When deciding whether a call can be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, the BSC determines whether the number of handover failures reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail. If the number reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail, the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is prohibited during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. Otherwise, the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed. After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the OL subcell to the UL subcell during the Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail.

After a UL subcell to OL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. If handover penalty is enabled, when a call is handed over from the OL subcell to the UL subcell, it cannot be handed over back to the OL subcell during Penalty Time of UtoO HO to avoid ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to 0, handover penalty is not performed on the OL subcell to the During the handover UL subcell handover. from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, the calls are hierarchically handled from level 63 to 0. Therefore, the calls with higher receive level can be handed over to the OL subcell first. The handover strip is decreased by Underlay HO Step Level every Underlay HO Step Period. This parameter, together with Underlay HO Step Period, controls the level strip of the When multiple the UL subcell to the OL subcell. In are sent simultaneously, calls handover from requests for the UL-to-OL handover other words, the time taken in with This parameter be handed whether the traffic not in the UL subcell determines lower level Underlay HO Step Level from doesload conform is the principle that Period. call subtractingmay determines over first. Thisthe handover strip to Underlay HO Step the UL subcell to OL subcell handover or the OL subcell to UL subcell handover in an enhanced of the best quality should be handed over preferentially. concentric the hierarchy handover algorithm is adopted to hand over the calls with Therefore, cell. When RX parameter is UL subcell higherthis level from theset to Yes, to OL subcell. The value of this parameter is the If the call in subtracting Underlay the OL Level from the signal level of set to Yes, time takenis in the OL subcell and ifHO Stepto UL HO Allowed parameter isthe handover the OL subcell to UL subcell handover is triggered when the traffic load in the UL subcell strip. is lower than En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold. If the call is in the UL subcell and the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is triggered, and if the UL to OL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes, a timer is started when the traffic load in the UL subcell is greater than En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold, thus parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL in the UL This handing over the MSs in the UL subcell to the OL subcell. If the traffic load subcell subcell subcell of an enhanced concentric cell. and UL is lower than En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold, the related timer is stopped, and the MSs in the UL subcell are not is set to Yes, the coverage of the If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter handed over to the OL subcell. OL When and UL subcell is determined by UtoO HO in the UL subcell is not taken into subcellthis parameter is set to No, the traffic load Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO account for triggering the UL subcell Threshold, TA handover or theTA Hysteresis.UL Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL to OL subcell Threshold, and OL subcell to subcell handover 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The level values in an enhanced concentric cell. This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. The level values 0 the channel assignment for to -47 dBm. In a concentric cell,through 63 map to -110 dBman incoming-BSC handover can be processed in one of the following modes: Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned. In a concentric cell, an intra-BSC incoming cell is preferentially assigned. processed in Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell handover request can be one of the following modes: No Preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment System Optimization: The measurement level on the BCCH of the target cell is added to algorithms. the intra-BSC inter-cell handover request messages. Then, the BSC compares the measurement value with RX_LEV Threshold, and determines the preferred service layer. During the comparison and determination, the BSC does not take the RX_LEV Hysteresis into consideration. Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned. Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned. If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and general channel assignment No Preference: A channel is assigned according to the access_delay in the channel request message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref., a channel in the OL algorithms. subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. Otherwise, a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.

This parameter specifies whether a channel is assigned based on the access_delay in the channel request message during an immediate assignment. If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to No, a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. If the Pref. of Optimum Layer parameter is set toand the access_delay in the channel If TA Assign Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes System Optimization, the current receive message is SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) in the OL request level on the lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref., a channelbased on the uplinkpreferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. the SDCCH. a subcell is measurement value in the measurement reports sent on Otherwise, Then, the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned. or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on the result of comparing the receive level on the SDCCH and AssignIf the Assign Optimum Layer parameter of comparing the TA and TA Threshold of optimum-level Threshold, and the result is set to System Optimization, the current receive levelPref.. SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on Assignment on the the uplink the receive level on the SDCCH is greater than or equal the SDCCH. Then, Only whenmeasurement value in the measurement reports sent onto Assign-optimumthe BSC determines whether lower in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be level Threshold and the TA is a TCH than TA Threshold of Assignment Pref., a TCH in the assigned based on the result of comparing MS. uplink receive level on the SDCCH and OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the the Otherwise, a TCH in the UL subcell is Assign-optimum-level Threshold, successful assignment. preferentially assigned to ensure and the result of comparing the TA and TA Threshold of Assignment Pref.. Only when the uplink receive level on the SDCCH is greater than or equal to AssignIn a concentric Threshold and thebe assigned than TA Threshold of Assignment Pref., a optimum-level cell, the TCH can TA is lower in the following modes: System Optimization: Based on the measurement reports Otherwise, SDCCH, the UL TCH in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the MS. sent on the a TCH in the BSC determines which service layer should be preferentially selected. subcell is preferentially assigned to ensure successful assignment. Underlaidvalues 0 through 63 the UL subcell are to -47 dBm. assigned to an MS. The level Subcell: The TCH in map to -110 dBm preferentially Overlaid Subcell: The TCH in the OL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS. No preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment algorithms. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold. #N/A One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell. RX_QUAL Threshold = RQ (ranging from level 0 to level 7) x 10. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_QUAL Threshold, UtoO HO Received Level determine the coverage of the Level This parameter is one of the parameters that Threshold, OtoU HO Received OL subcell Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. and UL subcell. When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. the Enhanced Concentric the OL This parameter is one of the parameters thatIfdetermine the coverage of Allowedsubcell parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is invalid. andSignal Intensity Difference = UO Amplifier Power Difference + Combiner Insertion UO UL subcell. When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter Antennas + Passcoverage of the OL Loss Difference + Path Loss Difference of Different is set to No, the Loss Difference of subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Different Frequencies. Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA UL subcell and OLEnhanced Concentric Allowed Measure the receive level of the Hysteresis. If the subcell at several different places if parameter is set to OL subcell use different antennas. The recommended number of the UL subcell and Yes, this parameter is invalid. The RX_LEV Threshold parameter refers to the threshold of the downlink receive level. places is five. The level values 0 through subcell have differentto -47 dBm. The OL subcell and the UL 63 map to -110 dBm transmit power. Therefore, the receive level of the MS in the UL subcell is different from that in the OL subcell. This parameter specifies the power that should be compensated for the OL subcell. The value of this parameter should be the sum of these items: UO Amplifier Power Difference, Combiner Insertion Loss Difference, Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas, and Pass Loss Difference of Different Frequencies. This value is measured whether the TA is used as a decisive condition be performed This parameter specifiesat the site. Multiple-point measurements shouldfor the when different handover.are used for the OL subcell and UL subcell. If the Enhanced concentric cell antennas Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is invalid. In other words, the power of the OL subcell is not compensated.

This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive quality is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover.

This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive level is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover.

This parameter specifies whether the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is enabled.

This parameter specifies whether the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is enabled.

This parameter specifies the load threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover, the load of the non-BCCH frequencies should be higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.

This parameter specifies the signal quality threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover from a TCH to a BCCH, the downlink receive quality should be lower than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO. This parameter specifies the K offset used in K ranking. To reduce the ping-pong effect in an handover, you are advised to subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle. uplink receive level on a new channel after an MS This parameter specifies the expected is handed over to a new cell. This parameter is used for the MS Power Prediction after HO. This parameter should be consistent with the UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold in Huawei II power control algorithm, thus ensuring a relatively high uplink receive level on the new channel after handover, increasing the transmit power of the MS, and avoiding call drops caused by too low a uplink receive level. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). This parameter specifies the period in which penalty is performed on the adjacent cells of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. The adjacent cells must be located at the Macro, Micro, or Pico layer other than the Umbrella layer. If an MS is moving fast, the BSC performs penalty on the adjacent cells of the cell where the MS is located. This parameter specifies the penalty value. Only when the MS is located at the Umbrella layer and the adjacent cells are located at the Macro, Micro, or Pico layer, penalty is performed. This parameter is valid within only the Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO. The two intra-cell handovers that occur during the period specified by this parameter are regarded as consecutive handovers.

When the number of consecutive intra-cell handovers reaches the maximum allowed, a timer is started to forbid the intra-cell handover. Intra-cell handovers are allowed only when the timer expires. This parameter determines the maximum number of consecutive intra-cell handovers allowed. If the interval of two continuous intra-cell handovers is shorter than a specified threshold, the two handovers are regarded as consecutive handovers. If multiple consecutive intra-cell handovers occur, the intra-cell handover is forbidden for a period.

The time threshold is calculated based on the cell radius (r) and the velocity (v). The threshold equals 2r/v. If the time taken by an MS to pass a cell is smaller than this threshold, the MS is regarded as moving fast. Otherwise, the MS is regarded as moving slow. According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. In hierarchical load handover, the handover strip increases by one Load HO Step Level for every Load HO Step Period, starting from the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. The handovers are performed as such until all the calls whose receive levels are within the range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth) are handed off the current serving cell. When the load of the cell is equal must greater than thethat of the Load HO Bandwidth. The value of Load HO Step Level to or be smaller than Load HO Threshold, all the calls served by the cell may send handover requests simultaneously, and the load on the CPU will increase rapidly as a consequence. In some cases, call drops may occur due to traffic congestion in the cell. Therefore, the hierarchical handover algorithm for load handover is used for the BSC to control the number of users to be handed over by levels. This parameter specifies the is dependent on the Edge HO level. The setting of this parameter period for each load handoverDL RX_LEV Threshold parameter. Only when the receive level of the serving cell is within the range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth), a load handover is allowed.

If the cell load is smaller than the value of this parameter, the cell can receive the MSs System flux thresholds correspond to the the cell rejects the MSs handed message handed over from other cells. Otherwise, system flux obtained based on over from packets, CPU load, and FID queuing load. The system flux level is the current flux control other cells. level of the system. 0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. Where, 0 indicates the lowest level and 11 When Load HO Allowed is set to Yes, Load HO Threshold should be set to 85. indicates the highest level. The traffic load of aallowed only when the seizure rate in lower than the value of this A load handover is cell refers to the TCH system flux is the cell. The load handover is triggered when the the maximum cell is greater have parameter. The handover performed over traffic load in athreshold may than the value of this parameter. In other words, the load handover is triggered when be ratio a higher tremendous impacts on the system. Thus, this parameter should notthe set toof TCHs occupied in a cell reaches the threshold defined The load handover. value. 1) for flow control level algorithm for the assigned system messages: [(Average Message Usage - Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold)/(Inner Flow Control Discard All Threshold - Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold) x 100]/10+1 (round-down for division operation). If the value is smaller than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, Level 0 is used. If the value is equal to or greater than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, the level is calculated. The value range is from 0 to 11. 2) Flow control threshold for corresponds to multiplying quality level accessby 10. An The value of this parameter the CPU to start to discard the channel 0 to 7 messages and paging handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is emergency messages: 80% . Flow control threshold for the CPU to discard all channel access messages and paging greater than the value of this parameter. messages: 100% . CPU usage smaller than 80% corresponds to level 0. CPU usage equal to or greater than CPU flow control threshold 80% corresponds to level 2. An increase of 5% means The value ofof 2 levels. Level 10 is the highest. The level value level 0 to 7 by 10. An an increase this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality can be 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, and emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS 10. is greater than the value of this parameter.

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.

This parameter specifies the quality level offset of the interface handover of the AMR FR service relative to non-AMR services or the AMR HR service (x 10). When determining whether an interference handover should be triggered, the system compares the receive quality of the MS minus the RXLEVOff with the handover threshold. For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a small value. When n = 1, that is, when the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal If 30, this parameter is invalid. tothe receive level of the serving cell is greater than or equal to 63, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 59 to 62, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 56 to 58, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 53 to 55, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 49 to 52, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 46 to 48, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 42 to 45, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 39 to 41, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 36 to 38, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 32 to 35, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is 31, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.

If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement report is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, the handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is allowed. If the downlink MRs are not included in the MRs received, and if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, a no downlink measurement report emergency handover is triggered. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover is preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available This parameter is used to control the no downlink measurement report handover and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. algorithm.

If this parameter is set to 0, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm is disabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is not allowed in this cell. If this parameter used to configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. This parameter is is set for 1, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm is enabled. Therefore, parameter decision theof the for the rapidly measurement report is Together with filter handover B, it is one filter nine filter parameters. receive level. This parameter is used for configuring related to no downlink dropped The allowed in this formula is as follows (in the trend of the receive of A1 withincan be corresponding cell. This parameter indicate specifies the drop program, the value level to A8 a period. obtained by subtracting 10 higher value, a more rapid and drop is required value of the If this parameter is set to a from the configured value, levelB is the negative for configured rapid triggering avalue):level drop handover. This parameter is used together with the Filter C1(nt) = A1 A1 to A8. A2 x configuring theC(nt-2t) ++rapidly dropped receive level. the Parameters x C(nt) + for C(nt-t) + A3 x filter for the A8 x C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt) is This parameter is used uplink RX_Level to parameter B, it is A1-A8. received at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is For details, referof the serving cell in the MR the nine filter parameters. The Together with filter Filter Parameters one of smaller than B,formula is asis below (in the program, the value of then the signal level is corresponding and if C(nt) follows the Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh., A1 to A8 can be considered to be rapid dropping. the configured value, and B is the negative value of the obtained by subtracting 10 from Filter parameters A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters A1 to A8 configured value): correspond to C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 and ai = Ai-10 (i A81-8). Therefore, among a1 to = x C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt) is C1(nt) = A1 x a1 to a8 in the program,theC(nt-2t) ++rapidly dropped receive level. the This the program, there must be for configuring x filter for theor equal to a8 inparameter is usedserving cellvalues smaller than at the time 0. nt. If C1(nt) is uplink RX_Level of the in the MR the nine filter parameters. The received of Together withif the receive level drops rapidly in a granularity period, you need to set A3 filter B, it For example, B, and parameterbelowis one of HO RX_LEV Thrsh., then the signal level is smaller than if C(nt) follows (in the program, the value corresponding formula is A2is 20. Inthe Edge C1(nt) = a1 x Cof A1+ a2 x can be = as to to A8 to 10,to be rapid dropping. this case, (nt) to A8 C(nt-t) considered A1 to 0, and10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the obtained by subtracting 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters A1 to A8 To trigger a rapid level drop handover, you should set C1(nt) to a Filter parameters configured value): B. and then the fast level drop appears in a MR period. The formula value smaller than a8 in the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8). Therefore, among a1 to correspond x a1 to C1(nt) = A1 to C(nt) + A2 x configuring in an MR.for the rapidly dropped receive level. the reflects the rapid drop of must belevel theC(nt-2t)than orA8 x C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt) is the cell + A3 x filter This parameter is used for C(nt-t) values smaller ++ equal to 0. a8 in the program, the serving cell in the MR received at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is uplink RX_Level of there You example, if thethe filter level drops rapidly in nine filter parameters.extent to to set A3 can configure receive to define the numbera granularity and theyou need which Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the of MRs used period, The For smaller than B,formula is asis below (in the program, the value of then the signal level is Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh., A1 to the level10, A1 to 0, if C(nt) tosetting this case, C1(nt) = a1 x C (nt) + a2 x can be = corresponding and and A2 follows the this parameter is complicated. A8 C(nt-t) to A8 to drops. However, the 20. In of considered to be rapid dropping. the configured value, and B is the negative value of the obtained by subtracting 10 from 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters A1 to A8 Filter parameters To trigger a rapid level drop handover, you should set C1(nt) to a configured value): value smaller than B. and the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8).MR period. The formula appears a Therefore, among correspond to C(nt) + A2 xthen the+ A3 level drop ++ A8 in C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt)a1 to a1 in C(nt-t) fast x C1(nt) = A1 rapid to a8 of the cell level in an MR.for the rapidly dropped receive level. the x is reflects the x This the program, there must be used for configuring theC(nt-2t) filter a8 inparameter is drop serving cellvalues smaller than at the time 0. nt. If C1(nt) is or equal to of uplink RX_Level of the filter to define the number of MRs used and the extent to which You example, if the the can configure parameter B, itin the MR the a granularity period, you need to set A3 Together with filter receive level drops rapidly in nine filter parameters. The is one of received For smaller than B, and the Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh., A1 to the level10, A1formula is A2is below (in the program, the a1 x Cof then a2 xsignal level is corresponding to 0, if C(nt) tosetting this case, C1(nt) = value (nt) + the can be = to A8 to drops. However,as follows of this parameter is complicated. A8 C(nt-t) and the 20. In considered to be rapid dropping. the configured value, and B is the negative value of the obtained by subtracting 10 from 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters A1 to A8 To trigger a rapid level drop handover, you should set C1(nt) to a Filter parameters configured value): B. and then the fast level drop appears in a MR period. The formula value smaller than a8 in the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8). Therefore, among a1 to correspond x a1 to C1(nt) = A1 to C(nt) + A2 x configuring in an MR.for the rapidly dropped receive level. the reflects the rapid drop of must belevel theC(nt-2t)than orA8 x C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt) is the cell + A3 x filter This parameter is used for C(nt-t) values smaller ++ equal to 0. a8 in the program, the serving cell in the MR received at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is uplink RX_Level of there You example, if thethe filter level drops rapidly in nine filter parameters.extent to to set A3 can configure receive to define the numbera granularity and theyou need which Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the of MRs used period, The For smaller than B,formula is asis below (in the program, the value of then the signal level is the level10, A1 to 0, if C(nt) tosetting this case, C1(nt) = a1 x C (nt) + a2 x can be = corresponding and and A2 follows the Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh., A1 to to A8 to drops. However, the 20. In of this parameter is complicated. A8 C(nt-t) considered to be rapid dropping. the configured value, and B is the negative value of the obtained by subtracting 10 from 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters A1 to A8 Filter parameters To trigger a rapid level drop handover, you should set C1(nt) to a configured value): value smaller than B. and the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8).MR period. The formula fast appears a Therefore, among correspond to C(nt) + A2 xthen the+ A3 level drop ++ A8 in C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt)a1 to C1(nt) = A1 x a1 to a8 in the cell x an x is reflects the rapid drop of must belevel in smaller than or equal dropped receive level. the This the program, there configuring theC(nt-2t) for C(nt-t) filter a8 inparameter is usedserving cellvalues MRMR.for the rapidly to 0. nt. If C1(nt) is uplink RX_Level of the filter to define the number of MRs the time of extent to which received at used You example, if the the can configure parameter B, itin the of the a granularity and theyou need to set A3 Together with filter receive level drops rapidly in nine filter parameters. The is one For smaller than B,formula is asis below (in the program, the valueperiod, the signal level is Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh., A1 to the level10, A1 to 0, if C(nt) tosetting this case, C1(nt) = a1 x Cof then a2 x can be = corresponding and and A2 follows the this parameter is complicated. A8 C(nt-t) to A8 to drops. However, the 20. In of (nt) + considered to be rapid dropping. the configured value, and B is the negative value of the obtained by subtracting 10 from 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters A1 to A8 Filter parameters To trigger a rapid level drop handover, you should set C1(nt) to a configured value): B. and then the fast level drop appears in a MR period. The formula value smaller a1 to a8 in the program, correspond to than + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 and ai = Ai-10 (i A81-8). Therefore, among a1 to = x C(nt-7t). C1(nt) = A1 rapid drop of the cell level in an MR.for the rapidly dropped receive level. the x filter reflects the x C(nt)there must be values smaller than or equal to 0. Where, C(nt) is This parameter is used for configuring theC(nt-2t) ++ a8 in the program, the serving cell in the MR received at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is uplink RX_Level of parameter define the number of MRs used and the The You example, if thethe filter level drops rapidly in nine filter parameters.extent to to set A3 configure Together with filter receive to B, it is one of the a granularity period, you need which For canthan B, and if C(nt) is below the Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh., then the signal level is smaller drops. However,as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be the level10, A1formula is A2 tosetting this case, C1(nt) = a1 x C (nt) + a2 x C(nt-t) = corresponding to 0, and the 20. In of this parameter is complicated. to A8 to considered to be rapid dropping. the configured value, and B is the negative value of the obtained by subtracting 10 from 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters A1 to A8 Filter parameters To trigger a rapid level drop handover, you should set C1(nt) to a configured value): B. and then the fast level drop appears in a MR period. The formula value smaller than a8 in the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8). Therefore, among a1 to correspond to C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-2t) ++ A8 x C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt) is the C1(nt) = A1 x a1 to reflects the rapid drop of must belevel in smaller than or equal to 0. a8 in the program, the serving cellvalues MRMR. there the cell in the an received at uplink RX_Level of the filter to define the number of MRs the time of nt.extent to which is You example, if the receive level drops rapidly in a granularity and theyouC1(nt) to set A3 can configure used period, If For smaller than B, and if C(nt) is below the this parameter is complicated.the need level is the level10, A1 to 0, and A2 tosetting this case, C1(nt) = a1 x C (nt) + a2 xsignal = drops. However, the 20. In of Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh., then to A8 to C(nt-t) considered to be rapid dropping. 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters A1 to A8 Filter parameters To trigger a rapid level drop handover, you should set C1(nt) to a value smaller than B. and the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8).MR period. The formula correspond to a1 to a8 in then the fast level drop appears in a Therefore, among a1 to reflects the rapid drop of must belevel in smaller than or equal to 0. a8 in the program, there the cell values an MR. You example, if thethe filter level drops rapidly in a granularity and theyou need toAn A3 This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. set For can configure receive to define the number of MRs used period, extent to which the level10, handover due the setting thisis triggered when the uplink receive quality is emergency A1 However, to bad quality case, C1(nt) = a1 x C (nt) + a2 to A8 to drops. to 0, and A2 to 20. In of this parameter is complicated. x C(nt-t) = greater than or equal trigger ULrapid level drop handover, you should set C1(nt) to a 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To to the a Qual. Threshold. When an emergency and then is triggered, drop appears in a MR period. The value smaller than B. handover the fast levelan inter-cell handover should be formula preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell reflects the rapid drop of the cell level in an MR. is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. MRs used and the extent to which You can configure the filter to define the number of the level drops. However, the setting of this parameter is complicated.

This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. An emergency handover is triggered when TA is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter.

This parameter is used as a switch to control the value determination method of measurement reports. When this parameter is set to Open, if DTX is used, the SUB values in the MR should be selected. Otherwise, the PULL values in the MR should be selected.

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to data configuration.

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to the Um interface error.

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to cell congestion.

When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK. By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the SDCCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK. By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter specifies the penalty time for AMR full rate to half rate (FR-to-HR) handovers. Before the timer expires, no AMR FR-to-HR handover is allowed if the previous FR-to-HR handover fails due to channel unavailability or channel mismatch. The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHFH HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the TCH REP_QUANT. By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the SDCCH REP_QUANT. By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for averaging the CV_BEP on the TCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for averaging the CV_BEP on the SDCCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.

This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for averaging the MEAN_BEP on the TCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for averaging the MEAN_BEP on the SDCCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original serving cell after an emergency handover due to timing advance is performed. After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original penalty cellthenot allowed. This parameter specifies the serving on is signal strength of the original serving cell to avoid ping-pong handovers after an emergency handover due to the timing advance. This parameter is valid only within the Penalty Time after TA HO. After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. The penalty level values 0 through 63 map penalty imposed on the This parameter specifies the duration of the to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.original cell where

an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. During the penalty time, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original This parameter specifies the serving cell is not allowed. degree of penalty imposed on the original serving cell where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. This parameter is defined to avoid ping-pong handover and is valid only within the Penalty Time after BQ HO. After an emergency handover is performed due to bad quality, the receive level of the serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the serving cell is not allowed. The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on the target cell. This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell penalty time. The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the timing advance. The TA value in a single MR may be inaccurate. You can set this parameter to average the TA value in multiple MRs. The average TA value serves as the basis for handover decision. This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighbor cells. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the channel quality on the SDCCH.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength.

This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost during interpolation. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is equal to or smaller than the value of this parameter, the linear interpolation processing of the lost MRs is performed according to two consecutive MRs that are lost. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of this parameter, all lost MRs are discarded, and calculations are made again when new MRs are received. is used to select the candidate cells during directed retry. If the receive This parameter

level of an adjacent cell is greater than the value of this parameter, the adjacent cell can be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the frequency at which the BTS sends the preprocessed MR to the BSC. After preprocessing the MRs, the BTS sends the preprocessed MRs to the BSC. For example, if this parameter is set to Twice every second, the BTS sends preprocessed MRs to the BSC every 0.5 second.

This parameter specifies whether the BS/MS power class should be transferred from the BTS to the BSC.

This parameter specifies whether the BTS should send the original measurement report to the BSC. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS should send the preprocessed MR and the original MR to the BSC. This parameter specifies whether the BTS should preprocess MRs. This parameter determines whether transmit power is controlled by the BTS or by the BSC. This parameter is set to YES if power control is performed by the BTS. This parameter is set to NO if power control is performed by the BSC. This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality. This parameter specifies whether to penalize the target cell where a handover fails or the serving cell where the TA is too great or the signal quality is too bad. If the target cell is congested and an incoming cell handover fails, a penalty is performed on the target cell to avoid the handover of the MS to the cell. When the TA is great or the signal quality is bad, ping-pong handovers are likely to occur. If a handover fails, a penalty should be performed on the serving cell. These kinds of penalties can be performed on cells in one BSC or on external cells. This parameter specifies whether to allow the inter-BSC SDCCH handover. After the handover prohibition time for the initial access of an MS, the MS can be handed over to another SDCCH in another BSC before a TCH is assigned. This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive emergency handovers. No emergency handover is allowed during the minimum interval. When the conditions for an emergency handover are met, an emergency handover timer is started. Another emergency handover decision can be made only when the timer expires. This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive handovers. No handover is allowed during the minimum interval. A timer starts after a handover is complete, and a subsequent handover is allowed only after the timer expires. The value of this parameter is the length of the timer. The parameter is used to avoid frequent handovers. After a new SDCCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel only if the time during which the MS occupies the SDCCH is longer than the period specified by this parameter.

After a new TCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel only if the time during which the MS occupies the TCH is longer than the period specified by this parameter.

This parameter specifies the switch of the ATCB handover algorithm. The ATCB handover algorithm can determine the coverage areas of the OL subcell and the UL subcell and balance the load between the OL subcell and the UL subcell and between the UL subcell and the adjacent subcell according to the actual networking. It can decrease the interference, improve the conversation quality, and achieve the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. 0: Close 1: Open This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.

This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.

This parameter specifies whether the quick handover is enabled. 0: NO; 1: YES This parameter specifies the threshold of the half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover. When an AMR call occupies a half-rate TCH, an intra-cell half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains lower than the configured H2F HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time. This parameter specifies the threshold of the full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover. When an AMR call occupies a full-rate TCH, an intra-cell full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains higher than the configured F2H HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time. The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handoverduring which HO Threshold or the H2F HOthe This parameter determines the period are the F2H the triggering conditions of Threshold. This parameter is handover are met. intra-cell full-rate to half-rate used with the two parameters. The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO Threshold or the H2F HO Threshold. This parameter is used with the two parameters. This parameter specifies whether the AMR handover is enabled. This parameter does not affect the dynamic non-AMR full-rate to half-rate handover. The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of downlink receive level of an adjacent cell. Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum downlink power of the candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset) The M criterion is met if the minimum value constraint of uplink receive level of the The M criterion supports the Filtered uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum uplink power of the candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset); adjacent cell. otherwise, the Mlevel of the adjacent cell >= (Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min Expected uplink criterion is not met. Access Level Offset) The M criterion is met if the Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min DL Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min Access Level Offset); otherwise, the M criterion is not met. This parameter specifies the ranges from 0 tointer-layer or inter-priority handover. This The value of this parameter hysteresis of an 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 parameter is used to avoid inter-layer ping-pong handovers. dBm). Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a serving cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold Inter-layer HO Hysteresis Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of an adjacent cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold + Inter-layer HO Hysteresis of an adjacent cell - 64. This parameter is one bit of the 16 bits that are used by the BSC to sort the candidate cells for handovers. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell. When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes. According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover islevel remains lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for a If the DL receive triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.handover is enabled, the relevant period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT

edge handover threshold can be decreased. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel interference, and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold should be adjusted based on the handover performance statistics and If the UL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for a the actual network performance to achieve the UL/DL balance. period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. 63 (corresponding to -110 enabled and The value of this parameter ranges from 0 toIf the PBGT handover is not dBm to -47 the edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel dBm). interference, and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold should be adjusted based on the handover performance statistics and the actual network performance to achieve the UL/DL balance. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 This parameter specifies whether the interference handover is enabled. dBm). When the receive level is higher the receive level threshold but the transmission quality is lower than the interference handover quality threshold, the interference handover is triggered. In other words, the MS is interfered and needs to be handed over. This parameter specifies whether the concentric cell handover is enabled. The concentric cell is used to achieve the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. The concentric cell handover can improve system capacity and conversation quality. The concentric cell handover can be classified into the UL subcell to OL subcell handover and the OL subcell to UL subcell handover.

This parameter specifies whether the time advance (TA) handover is enabled. The TA handover determines whether the timing advance (TA) is higher than the predefined TA threshold. When the TA is higher than the predefined TA threshold, a TA handover is triggered. The TA is calculated based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. The longer the distance is, the greater the TA value is. This parameter specifies whether the bad quality (BQ) handover is enabled. Whether a BQ handover should be enabled depends on the UL and DL transmission quality (BER). When the UL signal quality or the DL signal quality exceeds the BQ handover threshold. a BQ emergency handover is performed. A rise in BER may result from too low a signal level or channel interference. This parameter specifies whether to enable the edge handover algorithm. When an MS makes a call at the edge of a cell, the call may drop if the receive level is too low. To avoid such a call drop, an edge handover can be performed. When the UL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold or the DL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, the MS is handed over to a neighbor cell. This parameter specifies whether the layered hierarchical handover is enabled. Cells are set to different layers and different priorities to implement the layered hierarchical handover. Then, based on the layers and priorities, calls are handed over to the cells with high priority (priority is related to Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority). This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm. Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong handovers, the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the same layer and hierarchy. The PBGT handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs. This parameter specifies whether to enable the rapid level drop handover. When this function is enabled, an MS can be handed over to a new cell before the occurrence call drop caused by the rapid drop of the receive level of the MS. This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to This parameter load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro handover is algorithm reduce the CPU specifies whether a traffic load-sharingcell handoverenabled. is used The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel only in special conditions. assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer. The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to adjust abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. If load handovers occur frequently in a partial area, the cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be adjusted. This parameter specifies whether the intra-cell handover is enabled. Note: A forced intra-cell handover is not subject to this parameter.

This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled.

This parameter specifies whether to adjust the sequence of candidate cells. After the sequence is adjusted, the handover within the same BSC/MSC takes priority.

The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs. This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and 0408. This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.

This parameter Additional Reselect Param Indication (ACS) is used to inform an MS where cell reselection parameters can be obtained. If this parameter is set to 0, the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 from other bytes of the system information type 4 message. If this parameter is set to 1, thethe manual obtain PI and C2. parameters for calculating C2 This parameter specifies MS should correction of other from other bytes is properly configured, thetype 7 orof message. can be reduced and a If this parameter of the system information number 8 handovers better cell can be assigned to the MS. When PT is set to 31, it becomes more difficult for an MS to access the cell when CRO increases. This parameter Cell should be less than 25 dB only for cell selection. It is invalid for bring Generally, the CRO Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid because excessively large CRO may cell reselection. uncertainties to the network.In addition, the same CRO applies to the cells with the 1: barred same priority.For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08. 0: allowed This parameter affects only GSM Phase II MSs or GSM PhaseII+ MSs. Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08. Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short), sent on the broadcast channel, 0 0 Normal Normal indicates whether CRO, Barred PT are used. TO, and 0 1 Barred Actually, the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. For details, 1 0 Low Normal see 0508.In addition, Normal interval of 5s is required for C2-based a least 1 GSM Rec. 0408 andLow 1 cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection. When PI is set to 1, the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system information and determines whether a cell is reselected. When PI is set to 0, that is, C2 equals C1, the MS used to determine whetheris reselected based on the value of C1. This parameter is determines whether a cell cell reselection is performed between

different LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell This parameter specifies reselection hysteresis. the length of the timer for periodic location update. In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period This parameter service performance is improved. When the signaling traffic of channel, decreases, the specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging the that is, the number of usage of radio resources specific addition, when network increases, thepaging sub-channels on a drops.In paging channel.the location In actual situation, an MS the MS power consumption increases, and the average update period decreases, monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. For details, see GSMtime is greatly shortened.When setting this parameter, take into consideration standby Rec. 05.02 and 05.08. If the value of capability of the MSC and BSC, the load paging interface, Abis the processing this parameter increases, the number of on the Asub-channels in a cell increases, thus reducing the and VLR. MSs served by each paging sub-channel and interface, Um interface, HLR, number ofGenerally, a larger value is adopted in continuous prolonging the average servicesmaller value inbattery. For details about the calculation coverage in urban areas and a time of the MS suburbs, rural areas, or blind spots. of the paging group, see GSM Rec. 05.02. But the delay of paging messages increases, and the system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases. This parameter specifies the number of timeslots between the consecutive This parameter should be set on the basis that the paging channel is not overloaded. In transmissions of channel request messages be as small as possible. The load of the addition, the value of the parameter should by an MS. To reduce the collisions be periodically measured on the running the the RACH, an efficiency of AGCH. After the paging channels should on the RACH and to improve reserved for network. The value of This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks access algorithm is defined in GSM Rec. 04.08. of the the CCCH usage three this parameter should be adjusted on the basis The algorithm specifies for AGCH and CCCH is configured, this parameter actually indicates load. parameters: Tx-integer (Tbe sent simultaneously in all the cells in an LAC. Thus, the S A paging message must for short), maximum number of retransmissions (RET), and PCH. related to channel combination. response is, the an MS and the system performance. capacity of the paging channel in a cell, thattime of number of paging sub-channels in a This parameter affects the paging This parameter same as or similar to that in other CCCH to determine the parameter S. cell, must be theworks with the configuration of the cells of an LAC. This relations between this parameterbe reported by the MSs in a cell. This parameter is The parameter specifies the NCCs to and the configuration of the CCCH are as follows: an information element (IE) in the system informationiftype CCCH and SDCCH do not When this parameter is set to 3, 8, 14, or 50, S is 55 the 2 and 6 messages. If a bita physical channel. parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding share in the value of this measurement report to the BTS. The access (CBA). if the CCCH a byte (eight bits).a When this parameter is the cell 8, 14, or of S is 41 This parameter specifies set to 3, bar value50, this parameter has and SDCCH share Each bit indicates that cell accessand the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit physical channel. Value 0 maps with an NCC (0-7) is allowed. N is 0, the MS does notcell access isor 6, allowed.NCC N. When this parameter set to 4, 9, cell S is 76 Value 1 indicates thatismeasure the not level of if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a physical channel. this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For Together with CBQ, When see GSM Rec. is set details,this parameter 04.08.to 4, 9, or 6, S is 52 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical channel. Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority When this parameter isNormal5, 10, or 20, S is 109 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not set to 0 0 Normal share a physical channel. 0 1 Barred Barred When this parameter isLow to 5, 10, or 20,Normal if the CCCH and SDCCH share a set S is 58 1 0 physical channel. 1 1 Low Normal When this parameter is set to 6, 11, or 25, S is 163 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a physical channel. When this parameter is set to 6, 11, or 25, S is 86 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical channel. This parameter specifies set to 7, 12,enable S is 217 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not When this parameter is whether to or 32, the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. For different cells in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same. share a physical channel. If this parameter is setis set to network connection isifnot provided after the MS is a When this parameter to Yes, 7, 12, or 32, S is 115 the CCCH and SDCCH share powered off, thus physical channel. saving the network processing time and network resources. The timeslot for sending messages is a random value from the collection of {0, 1, MAX(T, 8)-1}. If the TC resources are changed before and after the handover, this needs to keep the The number for continuously transmitting the uplink data of the old channel. If TDM test duration of timeslots (excluding the timeslot used to send messages) between two adjacent channel request messages is a random value from the to 10 ms; if IP S+1, transmission is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is set collection of {S, , S+T-1}. is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is set to 20 ms. transmission When T increases, the interval between two adjacent channel requests increases, and RACH conflicts decrease. When S increases, the interval between two adjacent channel request messages increases, and RACH conflicts decrease, thus improving the usage of AGCH and SDCCH. The access time of the MS, however, is prolonged and the network performance is decreased when T and S increase. Under normal conditions, an appropriate T value should be used to ensure that S is as low as possible, and ensure that AGCH and SDCCH are not overloaded.

When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRHR encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRHR) timer expires, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRHR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel. When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRFR encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRFR) timer expires, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRFR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel. In an intra-cell handover, the timer T3103C is initiated after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMMAND from target channel. The timer stops after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMPLETE message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message. This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS. After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires. For the call on the TCH in stable state, the timer is initiated when the ERROR INDICATION, CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION, and RELEASE INDICATION messages are received, and the call reestablishment allowed is set to Yes for the cell where the call is. Upon receipt of a CLEAR COMMAND message from the MSC, the timer stops. The BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST message after the timer expires. This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections. The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires. The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC deactivates the channel, if the timer T3109 expires.

This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the outgoing BSC handover fails.

This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message.

After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. After the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message. In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the timer T7 is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure message. In an intra-BSC handover, the timer T3103 is initiated after the BSC sends a handover command. Before the timer T3103 expires, the timer stops if the BSC receives a Handover Complete message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message. The timer is initiated after the BSC sends the CR message; if the BSC receives the CC message before the timer expires, the timer stops; if the timer expires, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH channel.

This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure. The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.

Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable.

Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable.

This parameter specifies whether a cell configured with baseband frequency hopping Qtru Signal Merge Switch supports the intelligent power consumption decrease. with great difference between The QTRU signal merge algorithm is to prevent the calls

uplink signal strengths from assigning in the same timeslot. The BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5 second. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot the lowest uplink signal strength of this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, a forced handover is initiated on the calls with the highest uplink signal strength in the timeslot, and the calls should be handed over to another timeslot. P specifies the Observed the maximum receivedof paging messages that a cell is the This parameter specifies time of uplink number level difference, and N specifies Duration of uplink received level difference. allowed to send within a statistical period.

This parameter specifies the average number of paging messages that a cell is allowed to send within a statistical period.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of messages in the buffer of the cell paging group packet when the Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface is turned on.

This parameter specifies the interval between two cell paging group packets, which is an integral multiple of 50 ms.

The cell paging message packaging is determined by the system load. If the paging message packaging timer is enabled, the paging messages are packaged according to cells; otherwise, the paging messages are packaged according to the CPU.

This parameter specifies which type of interference band statistics algorithm to use, that is, whether interference band statistics algorithm I or interference band statistics algorithm II, when the frequency scanning function is enabled. This parameter specifies whether the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm after the cell is out of service. When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell is out of service. When this parameter is set to No, the BSC does not report a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell is out of service. This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services of low-level BTS for cascaded BTSs if the current-level sublink cannot be preempted.

This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services.

This parameter specifies whether the MS is forced to send a handover access message.

This parameter specifies whether the MS can be handed over to another channel through assignment procedure in intra-cell handover. If this parameter is set to Yes, the assignment procedure can be used for all types of intra-cell handovers. Frequency scanning refers to the scanning of uplink receive levels of cell frequencies. The scanning result reflects the strength of frequency signals received by the cell. This parameter specifies the scanning result type used from the start of a frequency scanning task to the reporting of a scanning result. Main/Diversity: current, minimum, maximum, and mean values of the main and diversity levels during the scanning of main and diversity antennas 0 specifies optimization. Maximum/Mean: maximum and mean values of the uplink receive level 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-cell handover timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained optimization. 0 specifiesin the statistics of call drops. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-BSC out-cell handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops. 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by outgoing-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained optimization. 0 specifiesin the statistics of call drops. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by incoming-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops. 0 specifies optimization.

1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by resource check are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops. 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by no MRs for a long time for the MS are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops. 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by forced handover failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops. 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by equipment fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops. 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by Abis territorial link fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.

0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the connection failure message is sent by the BTS because the release indication message is sent or the waiting period of call reestablishment times out, the call drops caused by this reason are not contained in the statistics of call drops. 0 specifies call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are When the optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are optimized,the call drops caused by the reasons except for the radio link failure, handover access failure, OM intervention, and radio resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. contained in the statistics of call drops. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained optimization. 0 specifiesin the statistics of call drops. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by OM intervention are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops. 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. In optimization, the call drops caused by handover access failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained optimization. 0 specifiesin the statistics of call drops. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio link failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops. 0 specifies optimization.

1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by sequence error are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained optimization. 0 specifiesin the statistics of call drops. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by unsolicited DM response are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops. 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by T200 timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call specifies whether the repeater is configured in a cell. by function of This parameterdrop counters are not optimized, the call drops causedThethis reason are contained in the statistics of call drops. the repeater is an extended equipment that is repeater is simpler than that of BTS, and

used for the wide area or indoor application solving the problem of blind area. Not only the repeater can improve the base station coverage, but also increase the total traffic volume of network. The setting of this parameter affects the handover. Because the distance between repeaters is long, the handover between repeaters can only be asynchronous. This parameter specifies may fail. Otherwise, the handover the delay of TRX aiding detection performed after the cell is initialized. The cell is unstable after initialization; therefore, if the TRX aiding detection starts immediately after cell initialization, a wrong decision might be made. In such a case, this parameter is used to specify a delay. This parameter specifies whether to allow flow control on the Abis interface. The flow control function applies to the call management. When the BSS is congested, some service requests are rejected or delayed so that the system load decreases. The flow control on the Abis interface is mainly used to balance the system load caused by Abis flow. By default, flow control on the Abis interface is performed. This parameter specifies whether to support the half-rate service in this cell. It is one of the cell reselection parameters in the system information type 3 message.

This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power level of MSs. It is one of the cell re-selection parameters in the system information type 3 message. This parameter is used to control the transmit power of MSs. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.05. In a GSM900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 19, mapping to the following: {43,41,39,37,35,33,31,29,27,25,23,21,19,17,15,13,11,9,7,5} respectively. Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an MS is level 5 (mapping to 33 dBm). The minimum transmit power supported by an MS is level 19 (mapping to 5 dBm). Other transmit power levels are reserved for high-power MSs. In a GSM1800 or GSM1900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 31, mapping to the following: This parameter is contained in the Cell Options IE of the system information type {30,28,26,24,22,20,18,16,14,12,10,8,6,4,2,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,36,34,32} 3 and 6 messages. Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an MS is level 0 respectively. If this parameter is set to Yes, the receive level of the MS equals the MS is level 15 (mapping to 30 dBm). The minimum transmit power supported by anmeasured receive level in FH minus the receive level obtained from are reserved on high-power MSs. (mapping to 0 dBm). Other transmit power levels the timeslots for the BCCH TRX. This parameter is imported with the requested bandwidth when the assignment request is sent. The actual bandwidth assigned to a user is the value of multiplying the requested bandwidth by the ActGene. The parameter here is the value of the actual ActGene multiplied by 10 in fact. When the resources are allocated in practice, the total bandwidth is expanded by ten times. The effect of the ActGene is from 0.5 to 1.

This parameter specifies the priority of the PS low priority service.

This parameter specifies the priority of the PS high priority service.

This parameter specifies the priority of the CS data service.

This parameter specifies the priority of the CS voice service.

This parameter specifies the included angle formed by the major lobe azimuth of the antennas in two cells under one BTS. The major lobe azimuth is measured from the north to the direction of the cell antenna in a clockwise direction.

This parameter is calculated according to the Included Angle and the actual Antenna Azimuth Angle. The Included Angle refers to the coverage area of the cell. Antenna Azimuth Angle = actual Antenna Azimuth Angle - Included Angle/2 This parameter specifies the number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH load measurement. The value of this parameter indicates the interval during which the BSC determines whether an RACH timeslot is busy. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58. This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send the overload indication message to the BSC. The overload causes include TRX processor overload, downlink CCCH overload, and AGCH overload. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58. This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot, that is, the load of the access requests on the RACH and the load of all the messages (such as paging messages and packet immediate assignment messages) on the PCH. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58. If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the value of this parameter, the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The interval for sending the CCCH This parameter specifies the interval for sending the overload message is CCCH Load Indication Period(s). overload messages. This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot.For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the CCCH Load Threshold, the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The CCCH overload messages include the uplink RACH overload messages and the downlink PCH overload messages.

This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send radio resource indication messages, informing the BSC of the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX. In the radio resource indication message, the TRX reports the interference level of each idle channel in the measurement period. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 08.08. The value of this parameter has 16 bits. The most significant bit indicates whether the parameter is valid. Bits 14-8 indicate the level threshold. Bits 7-0 indicate the BER threshold. The BTS adjusts the MS frequency according to the value of this parameter. This parameter is used for the fast-moving handover decision. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS calculates the speed at which the MS moves towards or away from the BTS, and reports the speed to the BSC through the uplink MR. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. If this parameter is set to a small value, the error is small. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error.If the value of this parameter is greater, the error is smaller. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error. For the BTS2X, this parameter is used to compensate the difference of RSSI between the time the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed and the time the TMA is not installed. The value of this parameter when the tower-mounted amplifier is not installed is 3 greater than that when the tower-mounted amplifier is installed. This parameter specifies the start frame number of the BTS. It is used to synchronize the MS and the BTS after the BTS is re-initialized. The frame offset technology arranges the frame numbers of different cells under the same BTS to be different from one another by one frame offset. Thus, the FCH and SCH signals of adjacent cells do not appear in the samelevels by which the the MS decoding. This parameter specifies the maximum number of frame to facilitate BTS RF power

decreases. The decrease in the BTS RF power is implemented through dynamic power control and static power control. For the BTS2X, this parameter is shielded. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS, this parameter is invalid. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS, power control is performed on the basis of This parameter of a TRX. the power level specifies the period during which interference levels are averaged. This parameter specifies radio resource indication message to the BSC, the Before the BTS sends thethe threshold used for interference measurement. interference The BSS the idle channels in quality of specified by this parameter by averaged. The levels onmeasures the uplink the periodthe radio channels occupied areMSs, calculates and reports the interference interference levels on the idle channels helps the BSC to result is used to classify the level on each of the idle channels. This into five assign channels. interference bands. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BTS determines the interference of thebased channels thresholds. The BTS, then, The BSS measures the uplink quality level radio on these occupied by MSs, calculates sends a radio resource indication messageof the idle channels. This helps the BSC to and reports the interference level on each to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication assign channels. message toto the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified According determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result levels. The values of these levels setting and interference analysis. into six interference provides reference for threshold are called Interf. Band Thresholds. For details, see GSM the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, The BTS determines Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two to the BSC. are too small, the interference is sends a radio resource indication message thresholds The BSC compares the busy and too obvious. Ifreported in the between the values of two thresholds resource indication idle channels the difference measurement report and in the radio are too great, the interferencedetermine whether to perform a handover. The interference band message to is not reflected. measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BTS measures the uplink quality level radio on these occupied by MSs, calculates The BSS determines the interference of thebased channels thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication messageof the idle channels. This helps the BSC to and reports the interference level on each to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication assign channels. message toto the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified According determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result levels. The values of these levels setting and interference analysis. reference for into six interference providesthreshold usedthreshold are called Interf. Band Thresholds. This parameter specifies the for interference measurement. For details, see GSM the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, and 12.21. The BTS determines Rec. 08.08, 08.58, the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates The BSS measures the uplink values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is If the a radio resource indication between the quality of sendsdifference interference level messageof the idle channels. This helps the BSC to to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and and obvious.the reports on each too channelsIfreported in the between the values of two thresholds resource indication the difference are too great, the idle assign channels. reflected. measurement report and in the radio interferencedetermine whether to perform a handover. The interference band is not message toto the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified According measurement result levels. The values of these levels setting and interference analysis. reference for into six interference providesthreshold usedthreshold are called Interf. Band Thresholds. Thisdetails, see GSM Rec.the parameter specifies 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. for interference measurement. For BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates The difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is If the a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and sends and reports If the difference between the of the of two thresholds helps great, the too obvious.the interference level on each values idle channels. Thisare toothe BSC to idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication assign channels. reflected. interferencedetermine whether to perform a handover. The interference band message totois not According the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified measurement result levels. The values of these levels setting and interference analysis. into six interference provides reference for threshold are called Interf. Band Thresholds. For details, see GSM the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, The BTS determines Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference betweenindication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy is reports a radio resource the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference too obvious. If the reported in between the values of two thresholds are too great, the and idle channels difference the measurement report and in the radio resource interference is not reflected. indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band

measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, set 12.21. If Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable is and to Yes, the directed try procedure is started If the following two conditionsvalues of two thresholds are too small, the interferenceThe if the difference between the are met: The cell supports the directed try procedure. is too obvious. If the difference between the the Cellof two thresholds are too great, the load parameter is greater whetherequal to values Direct Try Forbidden Threshold. than This of the cell not reflected. or to support DRX. To reduce the power consumption, interference is specifies the discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) is introduced to the GSM. The MS that supports the DRX consumes less power to receive broadcast messages that the MSs are interested in. This prolongs the service time of the MS battery. This parameter specifies the data service supported. The BSC that supports the DRX should send the dispatching message to MSs so that ThisMSs can use the DRX function. The as required. the value of the parameter can be set period occupied by broadcast short messages 0000000001: indicates that only the NT14.5K data service is supported. that are contained in a dispatching message is called a dispatching period. The 0000000010: indicates of the broadcast short message is supported. description and positionthat only the NT12K data service are contained in the 0000000100: indicates that sending sequence. service is supported. dispatching message in the only the NT6K data 0000001000: indicates that only the T14.4K data service is supported. 0000010000: indicates that only the T9.6K data service is supported. 0000100000: indicates that only the T4.8K data service is supported. 0001000000: indicates that only the T2.4K data service is is adjusted If this parameter is set to StartUp, the BTS transmit power supported. to the maximum 0010000000: indicates that only the T1.2K data serviceIn addition, the BTS transmit before the BSC sends a handover command to the MS. is supported. 0100000000: indicates that only handover to ensure the success of the handover. power is not adjusted during the the T600BITS data service is supported. 1000000000: indicates of anonly drops rapidly, a handover occurs. In this case, the BSC When the receive level that MS the T1200/75 data service is supported. cannot adjust the transmit power of the MS and BTS in time. The MS may fail to receive the handover command, thus leading to the call drop. This parameter specifies whether the BTS reports the voice quality index (VQI). If this parameter is set to Report, the BTS reports the VQI. The BSC measures the traffic on a per VQI basis. There are 11 levels of speech quality. If the level is low, the speech quality is good. The traffic related to AMR and non-AMR is measured separately, and thus the speech quality is monitored.

This parameter specifies whether to permit the low noise amplifier (LNA) bypass.

This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 8. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 7. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 6. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.

This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 5. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 4. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 3. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 2. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 1.When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC increases the uplink transmit power.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC decreases the uplink transmit power.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

When the receive level is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

When the receive level is higher than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the uplink power control.

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the uplink power control.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive quality.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of uplink receive level.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive quality exponential filtering formula.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive level exponential filtering formula.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step when the BSC increases the downlink power.

This parameter specifies the maximum allowed adjustment step when the BSC decreases the downlink transmit power.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the downlink power control.

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the downlink power control.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive quality.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive level.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive quality exponential filtering formula.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive level exponential filtering formula.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the TCH in a power control period.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the SDCCH in a power control period.

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands.

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands.

When the number of missing MRs in a power control period exceeds the value of this parameter, the power control stops.

This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS. 0-16 (0 dB to 30 dB in steps of 2 dB)

In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to DL In downlink power control, if the downlink RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains equal to this Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, the value of DL receive quality is greater than or the value of threshold, then the actual DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% In uplinkBER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 6: power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, then the the uplink receive quality is greater than contain to Qual. Level 7: BER power control, ifactual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should or equal UL this In the uplink greater than 12.8% Bad UpLEVDiff. UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. threshold, then This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the Level 7: BER greater than 12.8% receive quality.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the receive level.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the receive quality. This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the quality zone 2 (the RQ value is greater than or equal to 3) based on the signal level. In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step. When the downward power adjustment is performed based on steplevel, the maximum This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment the permitted by the permissible down adjustment step differs based on the than 3) based on the signal level. quality zone 1 (the RQ value is greater than 0 and less receive quality. This parameter specifies the maximum step length in decreasing the signal level in (0, In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades power control when the RQ is 2. 1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step. When the downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on in decreasing the signal level in This parameter specifies the maximum step length the receive quality. This parameter specifiesRQ ismaximum step length in decreasing the signal level in power control when the the 0. power Huawei when the RQ is is When control II control step algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, In the the powerpower control 1.calculated based on the signal quality, the upper thresholdbased onlower threshold of the stable state quality zone are set. When the 1-2, 3) and the the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power permissible down adjustment step. control is downward This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink When the performed. power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum quality for power control. permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. The mapping between the BER and the quality level the signal quality, the upper When the power control step is calculated based on is as follows: Level 0: and the lower threshold thresholdBER smaller than 0.2% of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for Level control. power 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% and the quality level is as follows: The mapping between the BER to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 7: BER greater from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 2: BER ranges than 12.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% is between the upperfrom 6.4% and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only Level 6: BER ranges threshold to 12.8% when theBER greater than 12.8% upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Level 7: signal level exceeds the The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an When threshold control step is calculated based on the signal quality, if the signal upper the power and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed the upper level threshold and the lower threshold ofthe lower threshold. Power control is performed only is between the upper threshold and the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. when the signal level exceeds the below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifiesto -110 dBm to -47 dBm. uplink quality for power The level values 0 through 63 map the lower threshold of the control. power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper When the The mapping the lower threshold of the quality zone are follows: threshold andbetween the BER and the quality level is as set. When the signal quality Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is Level 1: BER performed. ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% uplink quality upper threshold of the quality zone. This parameter determines the to 0.8% Level 3: BER rangesthe MS and the BTS is adjusted according to the quality and the Note: The power of from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: details, refer to 1.6% to 3.2% level. ForBER ranges fromthe Power Control 2nd Generation Control table. Level 5: BER between the BER to 6.4% The mappingranges from 3.2% and the quality level is as follows: Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 7: BER greater from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 1: BER ranges than 12.8% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% upper threshold and a lower threshold. Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% lower threshold. Power control is performed only when 6: BER ranges from 6.4%the 12.8% threshold or is below the lower threshold. Level the signal level exceeds to upper The level values 0 through 63 map Level 7: BER greater than 12.8% to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

This parameter specifies the number of downlink measurement reports used for predicting the level in power control. In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment. This parameter specifies the number of uplink measurement reports used for predicting This parameter specifies whether the compensation of AMR measurement reports is the level in power control. allowed by power II power control algorithm. In Huawei IIHuawei control algorithm, the average filter value in the history When this parameter is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction measurement report is set to Yes, the Huawei II power control algorithm puts the currently received in the filter to reports in the measurement report compensation function is applied measurement compensate the delay of power adjustment. queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. After values are added in the measurement report, compensate the receive level value in the history measurement report based on the change of the power. When determining whether to perform power control, the BSC performs weighted filtering on the values of the receive level and of the receive quality in several history measurement reports. The measurement reports may be obtained at different transmit power of the BTS/MS. To ensure the accuracy of the values for sampled for calculating This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports filtering, the values in the history measurement reports that signal quality before the BTS power adjustment. the average value of the downlink are obtained at a different transmit power from the current power must be compensated.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the AMR MS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous AMR power control commands.

This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS.Class 0 to class 15 corresponds to 0 dB to 30 dB, with a step of 2 dB. If this parameter is set 5, the power ranges from class 0 to class 4.

In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is higher than or equal to the In Qual. Bad Trig control, if the value of receive quality is Threshold contains the value DLdownlink powerThreshold, the downlink DL RX_LEV Upper greater than or equal to the value DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. of the of this parameter, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% In uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is higher than or equal to the UL Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% In the uplink greater than 12.8% Qual. 7: BER power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the Level Bad Trig Threshold, then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL value of this parameter, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual Bad Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the signal quality.

This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the receive level.

This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the receive quality. In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 12, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. This parameter determines the maximumquality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1In Huawei II power control algorithm, the permissible down adjustment step when RQ is 2. 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is 2, set for each quality zone. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. This parameter determines the maximumquality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1In Huawei II power control algorithm, the permissible down adjustment step when RQ is 1. 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is 2, After the BSC delivers the set for each quality zone. power control command, it should wait for a certain period before receiving power adjustment is message. based on the MR that maximum When downward an acknowledgementperformed Therefore,the level, the power control decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio receive quality. the BTS during permissible down adjustment step differs based on the environment of the parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step receive Thispower adjustment, but misses the latest changes of the receive level and when RQ is quality of the BTS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed. 0. To compensate the delay of power adjustment, the power control for a certain period After the BSC delivers the power control command, it should wait algorithm implements the prediction and filtering function. In other words, the BSC samples several downlink before receiving an acknowledgement message. Therefore, the MR that power control measurement reports, performs weighted filtering, and predicts N measurementduring decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS reports from the current time onwards in athe latest changes of the receive level and receive the power adjustment, but misses short period. This parameter determines the number of downlink measurement reports predicted by quality of the MS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed. thecompensate the of this of power adjustment, the previous number N. To BSC. The value delay parameter equals to the power control algorithm implements In prediction and control algorithm, other words, the BSC samples several theHuawei II powerfiltering function. Inthe average filter value in the history uplink measurement report is performs weighted filtering,decision. Instead, the prediction measurement reports, not used for power control and predicts N measurement reports function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment. fromparameter specifies whether a short period. This the current time onwards in the compensation of measurement reports is allowed This parameter determines algorithm. of uplink measurement reports predicted by the by Huawei II power control the number BSC. In other words, the value perform power control, the BSC previous number N. When determining whether to of this parameter equals to the performs weighted In Huawei the values of the receive level and of the receive quality history filtering on II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the in several history measurement report is The measurement reports may be obtained by the BTS/MS at measurement reports. not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction function is appliedpower. filter to compensate the of the of power adjustment. values in different transmit in the To ensure the accuracy delay values for filtering, the the history measurement reports that are obtained at a different transmit power from the current power must be compensated. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper This parameter specifiesthreshold enable quality zone are set. When the signal Huawei III threshold and the lower whether of the Huawei II power control algorithm or quality power control algorithm. exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level the signal quality, the upper When the power control step is calculated based on is as follows: Level 0: and the lower threshold thresholdBER smaller than 0.2% of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for Level control. power 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from BER to 3.2% The mapping between the 1.6%and the quality level is as follows: Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 7: BER greater from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 2: BER ranges than 12.8%

Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% is between the upperfrom 6.4% and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only Level 6: BER ranges threshold to 12.8% when theBER greater than 12.8% upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Level 7: signal level exceeds the The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an When threshold control step is calculated based on the signal quality, if the signal upper the power and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed the upper level threshold and the lower threshold ofthe lower threshold. Power control is performed only is between the upper threshold and the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. when the signal level exceeds the below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifiesto -110 dBm to -47 dBm. uplink quality for power The level values 0 through 63 map the lower threshold of the control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level the signal quality, the upper When the power control step is calculated based on is as follows: Level 0: and the lower threshold thresholdBER smaller than 0.2% of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power Level 3: control. BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% and the quality level is as follows: The mapping between the BER to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 7: BER greater from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 2: BER ranges than 12.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% is between the upperfrom 6.4% and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only Level 6: BER ranges threshold to 12.8% when theBER greater than 12.8% upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Level 7: signal level exceeds the The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands.

This parameter specifies the constant of filtering the collision signal strength for power control. The MS obtains valid measurement signals by sampling for NAVGI times.

This parameter specifies the channel where the receive power level of the MS is measured for the uplink power control.

This parameter specifies the reduced power of the BTS on the PBCCH.

This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the transfer mode, which is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet transfer mode. This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the signal level in the packet transfer mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet transfer mode and calculates Cn of the MS output power. The parameter specifies theperiod in between Cnidle mode, which This parameter specifies the signal strength filter relation the packet and Cn-1. is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet idle mode. This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the signal level in the idle mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet idle mode and calculates Cn of the MS output power. The parameter specifies the relation between Cn and Cn-1. This parameter specifies the initial power level. This parameter determines the expected receive signal strength on the BTS when the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control. This parameter is used for the open-loop power control. The MS uses the Alpha parameter to calculate the output power of the uplink PDCH, namely, PCH. When the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control, this parameter determines the This parameter the MS the maximum mapping to the reduced level ofspecifiestransmit power value of N3105. path loss. After a downlink TBF is established, the network initiates the N3105. Upon setting the RRBP field in the downlink RLC data block, the network resets the N3105 when it receives the packet acknowledgment message from the MS on the uplink RLC data block corresponding to the RRBP field; otherwise, the network increases N3105 This parameter specifies the maximum value of the N3103. by one and resends the downlink data block in which the RRBP field is set. Upon receiving the last RLC data block when the uplink transmission is complete, the When N3105 overflows, the network initiates the T3195. When the timer T3195 expires, network sends abnormally releases. the current TBFthe MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 and initiates the N3103. If the network does not receive a packet control acknowledgment message within scheduled time, the N3103 increases by one of N3101. This parameter specifies the maximum valueand the network resends the Packet Uplink Ack/Nackdynamic assignment mode, the multiple MSs can share one uplink channel if In uplink message. When this counter overflows, the network the downlink data blocks the release delay initiates the T3169. When this timer expires, Thiscurrent TBF specifies carry the USF value.the downlink TBF. of the parameter abnormally assign a USF value to the uplink TBF (uplink TBF is After the network starts to releases. After sending the last downlink RLC data block and confirming that all downlink data established), the N3101 is initiated. The network reserves the the MS of releasing this blocks are received, the network does not immediately notify RLC uplink blocks mapping to each set the last data block not received. Therefore, keep this receives valid TBF but forcedly USF for the uplink data sent from the MS. If the network TBF uplink data by continuously MS, the network resets the N3101; otherwise, the N3101 unreleased blocks from the resending the last downlink data block with the Relative increases Block Period (RRBP) flag. During the release delay of a downlink TBF, as long Reserved by one. When this counter overflows, the current uplink TBF abnormally data transmission, the This parameter specifies network has a requirement of downlink releases. as the upper layer of the the inactive period of the extended uplink TBF. Upon receiving the RLC blocks can be sent on (CountValue=0) from the MS that extracted downlink last uplink RLC data blocks this downlink TBF. At the same time, the supports the downlink TBF changes from release delay to downlink transmission. In TBF extended uplink TBF function, the network does not release this uplink status of immediately but set it to the inactive mode. To send the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack addition, during the release delay, the MS musttransmit the uplink RLC data blocks during inactive period, data block use this TBF that automatically becomes active message on the uplink the MS cancorresponding to the RRBP to maintain the instead of establishing a new uplink TBF. When the inactive period send the no uplink communication with the network. Therefore, when the MS needs toexpires, if uplink RLC data block needs to berequest through Channel Request Description carried in Ac data, it can send an uplink transmitted, the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink the message with FAI=1 to notify the MS Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message. of releasing the uplink TBF. In addition, when an uplink TBF 0 specifies that release delay function non-extendeduplink is disabled. The value is inactive, a the release delay of establish downlink TBF TBF. This parameter specifiesdownlink TBF can stillthe of the on this uplinkTBF. The receiving the last uplink RLC data block improve the network KPIs, especially for Uponextended uplink TBF function can greatly(CountValue=0), the network sends the the a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message(suchFAI=1 to notifytransmission and Ping) MS discontinuous uplink transmission with as interactive the MS of releasing this services. To establish the downlink TBF on the unreleased uplink TBF, the network will uplink TBF. The value 0 of releasing the extended for a TBF function is disabled (Also deactivate notify the MSspecifies thatthis uplink TBFuplinkperiod of delay after this parameter is set. this function on the BSC side). After the downlink TBF establishes successfully or after the delay time exceeds the setting time of non-extended uplink TBF, this uplink TBF will automatically release. The value 0 specifies that the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF is disabled. This parameter specifies that the MS performs the load-based cell reselection can be controlled. The load-based cell reselection is available to the MSs that the receive level is lower than this threshold.

This parameter is used to collect the statistics of GPRS transmission quality. If the receive quality is equal to or greater than this threshold, you can infer that the transmission quality is worsened.

This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE 8PSK transmission quality. If the MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission quality is worsened.

This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE GMSK transmission quality. If the MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission quality is worsened.

This parameter specifies the interval between two NC2 cell reselections in a cell.

This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive level of the serving cell is lower than the level threshold of cell reselection within the Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period; If the number of times is lower than this parameter, the cell reselection is allowed.

This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive levels of the serving cell are continuously calculated before the P/N criterion is determined.

This parameter specifies whether enabling the normal cell reselection algorithm is allowed.

This parameter specifies whether enabling the cell load-based reselection algorithm is allowed.

This parameter specifies whether enabling the critical cell reselection algorithm is allowed.

This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or 3G cell is selected in the inter-RAT cell reselection procedure.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighbor cells.

This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost exceeds this parameter, the previous MR is thought to be invalid. This parameter specifies that if the cell load is lower than this threshold, the cell can receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection. That is, the cell will receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection if the TBF multiplexing rate is lower than corresponding percentage.

The load-based reselection is enabled when the cell load is higher than this threshold.

This parameter specifies that the accumulatively calculated number of times that the downlink transmission quality of MS is lower than the transmission quality threshold of MS. The critical reselection needs to be performed when the ratio of the accumulatively calculated number of times and the number of times in the downlink transmission quality measurement report reaches this threshold.

This parameter specifies that the Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed can be determined when the transmission quality in the received downlink transmission quality measurement report is lower than this threshold.

This parameter specifies the penalty duration for the cell reselection. The cell penalty can be performed within the Cell Penalty Last Time only.

This parameter specifies the signal level for target cell penalty after the BSC receives the cell reselection failure message or after the cell initiates the load-based reselection. This parameter is valid only within the Cell Penalty Last Time.

To avoid ping-pong handovers, when this parameter specifies the cell reselection, the level of the target cell should higher than the total of the Min Access Level Threshold and the Cell Reselection Hysterisis.

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as This parameter for handover. a candidate cell specifies whether to support the QoS optimization. The GPRS GSN provides different subscribers with flexible QoS mechanism. The QoS level is determined in the subscription. The QoS control parameters include the service priority class, reliability class, delay class, and throughput class. During the negotiation of a QoS profile, an MS can apply a value for each QoS attribute. This parameter the request from the MS, the network negotiates a class for subcell and After receiving specifies the policy of the handover between the underlaid each the overlaid subcell in a PS domain. attribute of each QoS profile based on the current effective GPRS resources. The In version V9R8, the negotiated QoS PDCH configured in the overlaid subcell or in the network providesthe BSC supports theprofile with corresponding resources. underlaid subcell, and supported; handover between the overlaid subcell and the Not Support: QoS not supports the underlaid QoS supported. Support: subcell. The overlaid-to-underlaid subcell handover, underlaid-to-overlaid subcell handover, bidirectional handover between overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell, and no handover This parameter specifies the maximumunderlaid subcell are allowed for the handover between between overlaid subcell and transmission delay of the POC services. The POC the underlaid a strict requirement on subcell in a PS domain; by network between services have subcell and the overlaidthe transmission delay. Thedefault, this should support the no handover between overlaid subcell and measures to reduce parameter is set to detection of the POC service type and take underlaid subcell. the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the Transfer Delay in the This parameter specifies the value of this the bandwidth for the POC services. ABQP must be lower thanthe upper limit of parameter. The POC services over cellular. POCpush to talkhave a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink bandwidth GbrValue required by the ABQP the bandwidth for the POC services.of the This parameter specifies the lower limit of must be lower than the upper limit bandwidth for the have services. The POC services POC a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network POCpush to talk over cellular. the POC service type and take measures to reduce the should support the detection of transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink bandwidth GbrValue required by the ABQP must be lower than the upper limit of the This parameter specifies whether bandwidth for the POC services. to support the packet assignment, that is, the assignment of the packet channel to the MS through the PACCH, this only involves the POCpush to talk over cellular. takeover of the uplink immediate assignment. To improve the speed of the MS to access the network, after the packet assignment is taken over to the BTS, the BSC reserves This parameter specifies whether to support the takeover request information of the uplink resources for the BTS. The BTS obtains the channel of the packet immediate MS assignment by the downlink acknowledgment message from the MS, and by interpreting the BTS. It is relative to the uplink immediate assignment. assigns the To improve the speed of the MS to access the network, send the pre-allocates the uplink reserved uplink resources to the MS. Then, the MS can the BSS data blocks. TBF resources and sends these resources to the BTS. When the MS initiates the channel request, the BTS uses the pre-allocated resources to send the immediate assignment message to the MS. Upon receiving the immediate assignment message sent by the BTS, the MS can upload the data block. Meanwhile, the BTS needs to send the additional When both the MS and the network support PFC, the this request message, the BSC channel request message to the BSC. Upon receivingQoS parameters are obtained from the ABQP additional sends the in the PFC. immediate assignment message to the BTS to complete the setup When the MS or the network does not support PFC, the QoS parameters are obtained of the TBF process. from the DL UNITDAT of the SGSN or from the uplink request of the MS. Gbr:guaranteed bit rate. PFC: packet flow context. ABQPAggregate BSS QoS Profile.

This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set the MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you should dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality. To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all TBFs. This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink. To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should set this parameter to a value among MCS1-MCS9. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set this parameter to UNFIXED. This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, you should set the MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality. To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all TBFs. This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink. To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should set this parameter to a value among MCS1-MCS9. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, set this parameter to UNFIXED. This parameter specifies the mode of controlling the quality of links. During the data transmission process, the modulation scheme and coding scheme can be changed to This parameter specifies the average period environment, thus improving the quality of dynamically adapt to the radio transmission of bit error detected. This parameter can be used to obtain the forgetting factor, which is used for the MS to links. calculate and effect - Setting the measurement results. Link Adaption (LA): The network dynamically adjusts the coding scheme of a channel based on the transmission quality of the channel link. The link quality is determined by 8PSK MEAN BEP and 8PSK CV BEP carried in the Packet EGPRS Downlink Ack/Nack message. The network selects a proper coding scheme for transmission based on the measurement reports from the MS. For cells with good Um interface quality, the LA mode is usually used. Incremental Redundancy (IR): The network should retransmit only different data blocks This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CSinformation and the with the puncturing coding scheme. The MS buffers the history error type of the downlink TBF to change from through combined error correction. In the cell with bad data blocks are retransmitted CS4 to CS3. When the retransmission rate of the downlink good larger than or equals to the MS Um interface quality, the IR mode can achieveTBF is transmission quality, butthe value of this parameter, mode. For cellsthe downlink TBF changes fromthe IR mode is usually must support this the CS type of with bad Um interface quality, CS4 to CS3. used. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS2 to CS1. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS4. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS3. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS2 to CS3. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS1 to CS2. This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the downlink. To dynamically adjust the CS type on the downlink, set the CS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission quality. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, all TBFs use the default CS types.

This parameter specifies the fixed CS type used on the downlink. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, this parameter can be set to CS1, CS2, CS3, or CS4. If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the downlink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS2 to CS1. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS3 to CS4. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS2 to CS3. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS2 to CS3. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS1 to CS2. This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the uplink. To dynamically adjust the CS type on the uplink, set the CS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission quality. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, all TBFs use the default CS types. This parameter specifies the fixed coding scheme (CS) type used on the uplink. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, this parameter can be set to CS1, CS2, CS3, or CS4. If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the uplink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.

This parameter specifies the weight of QoS background services. The background class service is a kind of traffic class services.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP3.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP2.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Traffic Handle Priority 1 (THP1).

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP3.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP2.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Allocation/Retention Priority 1 (ARP1).

This parameter specifies the timer set to release the Abis timeslots. When a channel is idle, this timer is started. When the timer expires, the Abis timeslots are released.

This parameter specifies the number of channels reserved for the CS services. This parameter specifies the levels of dynamic channels preempted by CS services and PS services. Only full-rate TCHs are the dynamic channels that can be preempted. All dynamic channels can be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all the dynamic channels. Control channels cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all the dynamic channels except for the control channels. This parameter specifies the timer set to release the idle dynamic channel the all Dynamic channels carrying services cannot be preempted: It indicates thatafterCS TBFs on the dynamic preempt the dynamic services cannot channel are released. channels that carry services. If all TBFs on a dynamic channel are released, the dynamic channel is not released immediately. Instead, a timer is started when the channel is idle. Before the timer expires, if there are new services, the dynamic channel continues to be used and the timer is stopped. When the timer expires, the dynamic channel is released. This parameter specifies the policy for dynamic channel conversion in a concentric cell.

This parameter specifies the PDCH downlink multiplex threshold. The downlink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.

This parameter specifies the PDCH uplink multiplex threshold. The uplink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.

This parameter specifies the downlink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion. When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10, dynamic channels are used. This parameter specifies the uplink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion. When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10, dynamic channels are used. This parameter specifies the maximum ratio of PDCHs in a cell. The total number of TCHs and PDCHs available in a cell is fixed. The PDCH ratio is equal to PDCHs / (TCH/Fs + static PDCHs). This parameter determines the proportion of PDCHs to the total number of TCHs + PDCHs.

This parameter specifies the multi-frequency reporting value. Value range: Reporting the frequencies of six strongest cells; Reporting the frequency of one strongest cell; Reporting the frequencies of two strongest cells; Reporting the frequencies of three strongest cells This parameter specifies the threshold of HCS signal strength. The MS uses the signal strength in the MR and this threshold to calculate C31, which is used for cell reselection.

This parameter specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) priority of a GPRS cell. Value 0 indicates the lowest priority and value 7 indicates the highest priority.

This parameter specifies the maximum TX power level for an MS to access the packet control channel.

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level for an MS in the cell to access the system.

This parameter specifies whether the SoLSA exclusive access cell is used. Only the MSs customizing the Localised Service Area (LSA) service can access the exclusive cell.

This parameter specifies whether the cell can be accessed during cell reselection. Permit Cell Access: Access is permitted. Prohibit Cell Access: Access is prohibited. This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in different routing areas. When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the target cell belong to different routing areas, the MS starts cell reselection only when the signal level of the neighbor cells in different routing areas is higher than that of this cell, and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter.

This parameter specifies the period when cell reselection is prohibited.

This parameter specifies whether the MS can access another cell. Yes: The MS can access another cell. No: The MS cannot access another cell. This parameter specifies whether GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. Value range: 0, 1 0: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is not used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. 1: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. This parameter specifies whether GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis is applied to the C31 standards. This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in the same routing area. c31standard:in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the When an MS applied c31notuse: not applied target cell belong to the same routing area, the C2 value measured in the overlapped

area of two adjacent cells fluctuates greatly because of the fading feature of radio channels. Therefore, the MS frequently performs cell reselection. The frequent cell reselection not only increases the signaling flow on the network and affects the utilization of radio resources, but also greatly affects the data transmission rate of the MS and decreases the QoS as a consequence. When this parameter is used, the MS starts cell reselection only when the signal level of the neighbor cells in the same routing area is higher than that of this cell, and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard to start cell reselection.

This parameter specifies whether the PSI status message is supported. Yes: supported No: not supported

This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to send a measurement report to the network.

This parameter specifies the repetition period of the PS information PSI1. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PSI1 cannot be received in real time. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the PSI1 is sent frequently. This occupies many resources. This parameter specifies the persistence level 4 of radio priority access. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.

This parameter specifies the persistence level 3 of radio priority access. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.

This parameter specifies the persistence level 2 of radio priority access. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.

This parameter specifies the persistence level 1 of radio priority access. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.

This parameter specifies the number of timeslots for extension transmission in random access. This parameter affects the interval for the MS to send a new Channel Request after the channel request fails. This parameter specifies the minimum number of timeslots between two successive channel requests. The MS sends an access request and waits for a response. If no response is received after the minimum number of timeslots, the MS resends the access request. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 4.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 3.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 2.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 1.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority.

This parameter specifies the access control class. This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. Value 1 indicates one PRACH. Value 2 indicates two PRACHs. ... Value 12 indicates 12 PRACHs. This parameter specifies the number of PAGCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. Value 1 indicates one PAGCH. Value 2 indicates two PAGCHs. ... Value 12 indicates four PBCCHs. This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 4. Value 1 indicates one PBCCH. Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs. Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs. Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs.

This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet transfer mode.

This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet idle mode.

This parameter specifies the minimum duration when the MS stays in non-DRX mode after the NC NC-measurement report is sent. The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after the measurement report is sent.

This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. A higher value indicates a higher access priority.

This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent through the system message broadcast in each cell. When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires. This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS. Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time. Value infinity indicates an infinity offset. This parameter specifies the type of the extension extension measurement reports. interval between two measurement report Three types of the extension measurement report are type 1, type 2, and type 3. Type 1: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the network regardless of whether the BSIC was decoded. The measurement report should contain the received signal level and BSIC. Type 2: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the network. For the six carriers, the BSIC must be decoded successfully and the NCC specified by NCC_PERMITTED is carried. The measurement report should contain the received signal level and BSIC. Type 3: The MS does not need to decode the BSIC of the carriers that send the measurement report. The measurement report the interference measurement in level This parameter specifies the frequency index ofshould contain the received signal type 3 and interference measurement report. of the extension measurement of a carrier.

This parameter specifies the NCC bitmap of the measurement report sent by the MS. The MS reports only the NCC bitmap of the BSIC and the carrier measurement report that matches the bitmap.

The network can require the MS to send measurement reports. When the MS is in idle mode, it sends the extension measurement reports. This parameter can be set to em0 or em1. This parameter specifies whether the CS paging on the A interface is supported. Yes: The MS can receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service. No: The MS cannot receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service. This parameter specifies whether the 11-bit EGPRS access is supported. Yes: supported No: not supported

This parameter specifies the priority of packet access of MSs to a cell. The 2bit Radio This parameter specifies by the MS in the Packet ChannelGPRS cell. Priority message carried the routing area color code of a Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. When an MS accesses the network, the BSC compares the Radio Priority in the Channel Request message with the parameter setting in the cell. The BSC requests for establishing the TBF for a channel only when the radio priority reaches the access priority of the cell. The values of this parameter area as follows: No packet access This parameter specifies Packet access of level 1 whether the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the cell. levels 1-2 Packet access of SPLIT_PG_CYCLE levels 1-3 Packet access of is used to set the DRX period. For the BTS and MS supporting the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE-based paging groups on the CCCH, this parameter is optional. Packet access of levels 1-4 Yes: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmittednetwork requests the MS to send In the cell reselection required by the network, the on the CCCH of the cell. No: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is reselection. There are three of the cell. measurement reports to control its cellnot transmitted on the CCCH network control modes. nc0: Normal MS control. The MS performs automatic cell reselection. nc1: MS control with measurement reports. The MS sends measurement reports to the network and performs automatic cell reselection. nc2: Network control. The MS sends measurement reports to the network but does not perform automatic cell reselection. This parameter specifies the value of PAN_MAX. It is also the maximum value of N3102. Value 4 indicates that PAN_MAX is 4; value 32 indicates that PAN_MAX is 32; value No use indicates that this parameter is not used. This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When the MS receives a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message from the network for increasing the value of V(S) or V(A), the MS increases N3102 by PAN_INC. Value 0 indicates that PAN_INC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_INC is 7; value No use indicates that this parameter is not used. This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When T3182 expires, the MS decreases N3102 by PAN_DEC. Value 0 indicates that PAN_DEC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_DEC is 7; value No use This parameter specifies the is not used. indicates that this parametermaximum countdown value of the MS. This parameter determines BS_CV_MAX and is used for the MS to calculate the CV. The parameter also determines the duration of the T3198 timer. Every time the MS sends an uplink RLC data block, the receive state of the data block is set to Pending and the T3198 is started. If the MS receives a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message before T3198 expires, it updates the receive state of each uplink RLC data block based on the acknowledgment bitmap contained in the message. If T3198 for the RLC data block in the Pending state expires, the MS setstypereceive stateMS. This parameter specifies the acknowledgment message the used by the of this data block to Nack pulses are used, the data block. If four access and retransmits the timing advance can be obtained without a polling message. If the RLC/MAC control block is used, the timing advance can be obtained only by sending a polling message. Four access pulses are recommended.

This parameter specifies the access burst type used by the MS on the PRACH and PTCCH/U. The access burst type is carried in the packet control acknowledgment message. This parameter specifies the maximum duration of the non-DRX mode. DRX 8bit: access using the 8-bit burst (discontinuous reception) is a parameter carried by the cell broadcast message. 11bit: access using the 11-bit burst certain period when changing from the packet The MS stays in the DRX mode for a SI13 indicates the access burst type. After the TBF is released, the MS monitors all the transfer mode to the packet idle mode. CCCH blocks during the non-DRX mode period and the BSC6000 reserves the MS context. The reservation time dependsfor the MS to wait for the TBF release after This parameter specifies the timer set on the smaller value between DRX_Timer_Max and NON_DRX_TIMER. block. receiving the last data NON_DRX_TIMER is negotiated with the SGSN during the GPRS attachment ofreceivesand its value data blockhigh. Therefore, the reservation time When the MS the MS the last RLC is usually carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and actually dependsthe RLC data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet confirms that all on DRX_TIMER_MAX. Value 0 indicates that the MScarrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts Downlink Ack/Nack message enters the DRX mode immediately. Value 1 indicates that the MS enters the DRX mode one second later. Value n indicates T3192 at the same time. that the MS enters the DRX mode the TBF resources and monitors paging channels. If T3192 expires, the MS releases n seconds later. wait for the Packet Uplink This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to During the TBF release process, if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet Assignment message. Uplink Assignment message, maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet This parameter specifies the the MS responds immediately. If the MS does not receive the Packet Uplink Assignment message during the TBF Packet Uplink Assignment message. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or release process, the MS enters the packet idle mode. If the MS is in dual transfer mode, Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description, T3168 is started to it entersthe Packet Uplink Assignment message from the network. wait for the dedicated mode. If the MS receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message before T3168 expires, are Based on the paging channel used by the system, the network operation modes T3168 is reset. Otherwise, the Operation Mode I, Network procedure again for and Network the classified into Network MS initiates the PS access Operation Mode II, four times. If Packet Uplink Assignment message is still not received, the MS regards that this uplink Operation Mode III. TBF establishment has is configured, Network Operation Mode I is used. When the GS interface failed. When the Gs interface or the PCCCH is not configured, Network Operation Mode II is used. When the Gs interface is not configured but the PCCCH is configured, Network Operation Mode III is used.

Configuration Policy

The network has four layers, numbered 1-4 respectively. If the number of the layer is small, the priority of the layer is high. This parameter and Cell Priority determine the priority of a cell. The priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells for None

None

This parameter should be set as required.

1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the received co-channel signals are useful signals. If a burst is incon Each layer has 16 priorities, numbered 1-16 respectively. If the number of the priority is small, the priority is high. This parameter along with Layer of the Cell determines the priority of a cell. The priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells fo

None

None

None

None

None

None Yes: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet transmission mode, the network informs the MS of the system information about neighbor cells in advance. No: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet None

None

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports the information about all neighbor cells to the PCU when there are more than 32 neighbor cells. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC reports the information about a maximum of 32 neighbor cells to the PC

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system int The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected.

None

None

None

As specified in Huawei concentric cell technology, a concentric cell is divided into an OL subcell and a UL subcell. The TRXs of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell can use different frequency reuse modes. The concentric cell technology can be combined

None

When the BCCH is configured in the OL subcell, it is not configured in the UL subcell. The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment

is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be activated. Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated. When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be set to Not Activated if the Active State of the upper-level Generally, the timeslots are automatically calculated and BTS is set to Not Activated. assigned. The timeslots, however, can be also manually assigned to meet the requirement of operators. The manually assigned OML timeslot cannot be adjusted when the timeslot is arranged. The manually assigned OML timeslots can only be modified manually. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.

This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.

This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.

None

This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied subrack.

None

This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied E1 port. If all semi-permanent links are configured on one interface board, the In-BSC Port No. and the Out-BSC Port No. must be set to different E1 ports on the interface board.

This parameter is to be viewed only.

None

None

None The BTS2X supports frame FH and RF FH. The BTS3X of all versions supports the cross-cabinet baseband FH and RF FH, including the timeslot FH and frame FH. The doubleAdjust the cell coverage area baseband FH and RF FH, transceiver BTSs support the by configuring the Power Level; however, when the antenna is over high not covers including the timeslot FH and frame FH, but do and support too cross-cabinet baseband FH. the many cells, you should lower the antenna and increase the tilt of the antenna first. When the transmit power of a BTS reduces, the indoor coverage becomes worse. Generally, for cells of the same priority in a network, the power level configuration should ensure that the EIRPs of the cells are basically the same. When configuring the power level, you should note that different TRXs in a cell can have different losses due to different combination modes. None

None

The smaller this parameter is, the higher the TRX priority is. In other similar conditions, channels are allocated to the TRX with higher priority.

None

None

This parameter takes effect only for the EDGE-enabled TRX.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too great or too small value, the cabinet top output power of the BTS is different from the TRX output power, resulting in the failure of channel allocation.

None

This parameter is to be viewed only.

This parameter is to be viewed only.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

There are two types of slot number: logical slot number and physical slot number. When configuring RSL links, set this parameter to the logical slot number of the GXPUM.

This parameter need not be set when the Work Mode is set to Auto. You must set this parameter when the Work Mode is set to Manual. When the Work Mode is set to Free-run, this parameter is 0.

None

None

None

None The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If 1. On the uplink: set to a too small value, the handover this parameter is decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference success rate may be affected. 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC.To enable this function, the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC side. If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side, downlink DTX None be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter. cannot If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side, the setting of this parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in a cell. None

None

None

None If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink and downlink levels.

The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No.power The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop Call reestablishment lasts no voice time, and therefore the transmission in the case of for a longtransfer. This function subscriber cannotbenefits: hooks on. It is recommended has the following wait and that this parameter be set tothe power consumption of the 1. On the uplink: decreasing Yes.

MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. None

None

None

None

None

None When the total power of the carrier on the single QTRU board exceeds the maximum permissible output power, the power sharing algorithm needs to be enabled. If the data configuration detects that the power sharing must be used, but the corresponding downlink power control of a cell is disabled. The power must be adjusted or the downlink power control must be enabled. None

None

None

None

None If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient half-rate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the capacity of the BSC is reduced. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the half-rate If this parameter is set to a highervalue, the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very low. The calls use the seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient half-rate channel even bethere are enoughMS. Thus, the half-rate channels can if assigned to the full-rate channels, which influences the speech quality. capacity of the BSC is reduced. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very low. The calls use the half-rate channel even if there are enough full-rate channels, which influences the speech quality. None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the burst influence may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the judgment is imprecise.

This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of accidental factors may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the judgment is imprecise. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists.

None

None

None

None

None

It is recommended not to use the TIGHT BCCH algorithm in multiband network.

None

None

Huawei recommends that the parameter Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed be set to No, the forced handover may fail in the concentric cell. In a normal cell, Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes to ensure that the timeslot If this parameter be performed in cannot arrangement can is set too small, itthe cell. correctly indicate the idle state of the current SDCCHs and consequently the rollback of SDCCHs immediately triggers adjustment and affects the network performance. If this parameter is set too large, the channel allocation algorithm becomes less sensitive and consequently the SDCCHs stay in idle state and cannot be rolled back for a long period of time.set too small, the SDCCHs in the cell If this parameter is may be insufficient and the dynamic adjustment cannot be initiated, thus affecting the access of users. It is meaningless to set the parameter too large.

If this parameter is set too large and consequently there is a small number of requests for SDCCHs, the SDCCHs of a cell are in idle state; If this parameter is set too small and consequently there is a large number of requests for SDCCHs, the requests cannot meet the requirements. The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates. Therefore, the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3. The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H).

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS. The five bits represent the coding rates from 7.40 kbit/s to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the None coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding rates can be selected simultaneously. If only one coding rate is specified by this parameter, then the parameter AMR Starting Mode (H) must be set to 0, which means the lowest coding rate. All AMR coding rate None adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless. If two coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0 or 1. The parameters AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (H), AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H), and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless. The AMRcoding rates are specified by thiscoding rates. If three ACS (F/H) contains at most four parameter, then Therefore, the value of this parameter 1, or 2. The AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0,ranges from 0 to 3. The values 0 to 3 UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (H),rates ULAMR parameters AMR match those of the coding AMR of Coding ACS adj.hyst1 (H), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H), and Rate(F/H). AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless. None coding rates are specified by this parameter, then If four AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3. All the AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningful. None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS. The eight bits represent the coding rates from 12.2 kbit/s None to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding rates can be selected simultaneously. If only one coding full rate is specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (F) must be set to 0. All the AMR None rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are coding meaningless. If two coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (F) can be set to 0 or 1. The parameters AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (F), AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F), and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are meaningless. If three coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode set can be set value, the call completion If this parameter is (F) to a great to 0, 1, or 2. The parameters is increased andRateQoS of the network is rate of MSs AMR UL Coding the adj.th1 (F), AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F), AMR DL Coding Rate load of the and AMR improved. This, however, increases the adj.th1(F), BSC. DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are To improve the success rate of reassignment, it is meaningless. recommendedrates the default valuethis parameter, be If four coding that are specified by Different Band then used.Starting Mode (F) can be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3. All the AMR That is, the frequency band of the preferentially reassigned channel is different from what is used in theare AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis original assignment. meaningful. Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter during an upgrade. If receiving short messages is allowed, this parameter must be set to No. If this parameter is set to Yes, MSs cannot receive short messages. In satellite transmission mode, this function can be enabled to reduce the impact of the delay in satellite transmission on the signaling processing rate. For terrestrial transmission, the default value of this parameter is No.

None

The eMLPP supports a maximum of seven priorities (A, B, and 0-4). The two highest priorities are reserved only for local use in the network. Priorities 0-4 are used for subscribers all over the world. If the eMLPP function needs to be fully implemented, the If this parameter is set to MS (includinginitiatesrequired. support of the MSC, HLR, Yes, the BSC SIM) is a reassignment when receiving an assignment failure message from the Um interface. This helps to improve the call completion rate and the QoS of the network. If there are a large number of assignment failure messages, the BSC initiates many re-assignment procedures and thus the BSC load increases. None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

Ec/No means Signal Noise Ratio in WCDMA. It maps with C/I in GSM. RSCP, Received Signal Code Power

None

None

None

Serving Band Reporting is valid if Report Type is set to EMR.

None

None

position is still available, the MS reports the measurement results of other neighboring cells regardless of the bands at which the neighboring cells are located. If this parameter is set to 2, the MS reports the measurement results of two neighbor cell known and permitted by the NCC at each band with the best signal (the band serving the current cell not included). The MS reports the measurement result of the neighbor cell at the band serving the current cell in the redundant position. If the redundant position is still available, the MS reports the measurement results of other neighbor cells regardless of For bands at which the neighbor cells recommended that the a 900/1800 MHz CoBCCH cell, it is are located. this parameter beis set to 3, the MS reports the If this parameter set to Yes. For a 1800 MHz cell inof three neighbor cells known and measurement results the dual-band network, it is recommended that this each band with the best permitted by the NCC atparameter be set to Yes. signal (the If the A5/4-7 encryption cell not included). The band serving the current algorithm is used, it is MS reports recommended that this of the neighbor cell at the the measurement resultparameter be set to Yes. band If this parameter is set to a small value, radio linksIf the serving the current cell in the redundant position. are likely to be faulty and therefore available, the MS reports the redundant position is still call drops occur. If this parameter is set to a great value, a long time lasts measurement results of other neighbor cells regardless of before an MSwhich the neighbor and therefore resource the bands at disconnects a call, cells are located. usage is low. Thisvolumes of multiple bands are the same When the traffic parameter takes effect on the downlink. and there is no special requirement on the band, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to 0. When the traffic volumes of multiple bands are different and the MS is expected to enter None a band preferentially, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to 3. In other cases except the first two cases, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to 1 or 2. For details, see GSM Rec. This parameter can be used to control network load based 05.08. on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from accessing the network. It is recommended that this parameter be not used. This parameter can be used to control network load based on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from accessing the network. It is recommended that this parameter be not used. This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is high, it is recommended this parameter be set to 1. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is not obvious. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is not obvious. If the parameter is set to Yes, the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is sent. If the parameter is set to No, the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is not sent. If this parameter is set to Yes, the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. None

None

None

None

None

None Only the BTS3X in G3BTS32.30000.04.1130 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs support the LAPDm N200 parameter. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC does not send the LAPDm N200 parameter. If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end If a BTS does not support this parameter, the parameter may mistakenly No. Otherwise, link is faulty and the should be set to regard that the the BTS cannot be data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a initialized. response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the T200 is set toof too small value,reduced.If T200 and If timer success rate a transmission is the transmit end N200 are set to regard that the link is faulty and the data may mistakenly too great values, the channels are seized all along when the link is faulty. transmit end receives a transmission fails before the Thus, resources are wasted. response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the T200 is set toof too small value,reduced.If T200 and If timer success rate a transmission is the transmit end N200mistakenly too great values, the channels are seized all may are set to regard that the link is faulty and the data along when the link is faulty. transmit end receives a transmission fails before the Thus, resources are wasted. response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the T200 is set toof too small value,reduced.If T200 and If timer success rate a transmission is the transmit end N200 are set to regard that the link is faulty and the data may mistakenly too great values, the channels are seized all along when the link is faulty. transmit end receives a transmission fails before the Thus, resources are wasted. response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the T200 is set toof too small value,reduced.If T200 and If timer success rate a transmission is the transmit end N200mistakenly too great values, the channels are seized all may are set to regard that the link is faulty and the data along when the link is faulty. transmit end receives a transmission fails before the Thus, resources are wasted. response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the T200 is set toof too small value,reduced.If T200 and If timer success rate a transmission is the transmit end N200mistakenly too great values, the channels are seized all may are set to regard that the link is faulty and the data along when the link is faulty. transmit end receives a transmission fails before the Thus, resources are wasted. response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set toof too small value,reduced.If T200 and and the success rate a transmission is the transmit end may are set to regard that the link is faulty and the data N200mistakenly too great values, the channels are seized all transmission fails before the Thus, resources are wasted. along when the link is faulty. transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of transmission is decreased. If T200 and N200 are set to too great values, the channels are seized all along when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are Generally, this parameter is set to 1. It is set according to wasted. the actual BTS receiver sensitivity and the minimum MS access level. RACH Busy Threshold must be greater than RACH Min.Access Level. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the allowable error for the random access signal is high and an MS can easily access the network. But the error report rate is high. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the error report rate of the MS is low but the MS cannot easily access the network.

function. BCCH aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another normal TRX in this cell. BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback functions after the originally configured BCCH TRX is recovered. Baseband FH aiding: When the TRX involved in baseband FH in the cell is faulty or BCCH aiding is performed in the cell, baseband FH aiding occurs and the cell is initialized as a non-hopping cell. Baseband FH aiding switchback: When all the TRXs involved in baseband hopping in the cell are recovered and the originally configured BCCH TRX is normal, baseband FH aiding switchback can be performed and the cell is restored to the baseband FH mode. None TRX aiding (BCCH aiding or baseband FH aiding) or After switchback occurs, the cell is re-initialized. All types of BTSs has strong anti-interferencefunction within The AMR coding will not perform the aiding capabilities. 15 minutes afterframe erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding Under the same the default cell is initialized (you can configurea low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If supports the BTSs in this period). the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. than that in non-AMR coding mode. (FER), the AMR coding Under the same frame erasure rate supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. than that in non-AMR coding mode. (FER), the AMR coding Under the same frame erasure rate supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. than that in non-AMR coding mode. (FER), the AMR coding Under the same frame erasion rate supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in of the parameter mode.high, the cells with If the value non-AMR coding is too

heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that the handover does not make sense. If the value of the parameter is too low, it is difficult to select candidate target cells. For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), this parameter must be set according to the actual receiver sensitivity of the BTS and the minimum access level of the MS to ensure None the balance between the uplink and the downlink. This parameter also affects handover access of RACH BURST during asynchronous handover. For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs, this Properly setting this affect MS access but affects paging parameter does not parameter can increase the the success rate. If this parameter If the level too great by the reporting of CCCH_LOAD_IND. is set to a received value, congestion may occur. BCCH on the network side is greater than the RACH Busy Threshold, the CCCH_LOAD_IND is counted once whether the decoding is successful. The RACH whose level is lower than the RACH Busy Threshold and whose decoding is successful is also counted. The measurement period is the Average RACH Load Timeslot Number. If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS easily considers that the RACH timeslot is busy and reports overload messages to the BSC. If the value is too great, the If the value of this parameter does not match with the value BTS cannot determine the status of the RACH timeslot The physical information is sent is generated. supported correctly. by the BTS, an alarm over the FACCH. Four TDMA frames BTS24, if this time at the interval of 18 ms. If busy For the are sent each parameter is used to determine the value of T3105 is smaller than orwith that 18the BTS30. If timeslot, its setting is consistent equal to in ms, the BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS this parameter is the level threshold for valid random when the timer T3105 expires with that in the BTS20. access, its setting is consistentfor the first time.If the transmission of the BTS312, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, The settings of the physical information over the FACCH is not complete, the expiration is invalid because the time is BTS3002C, and double-transceiver BTS must be consistent shorter than an FACCHrequirement increased when with value of this parameter can be of the BTS30. The the meaning and period.Considering the previous factors, 20 ms is the reasonable minimum value for this handover becomes slow or the handover success rate parameter.because of clockdefault value poor parameter is decreases At present, the problems or of this 70 ms. transmission.An MS can be handed over only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO DETECT (120-180 ms). Otherwise, the handover fails.

This parameter can be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is applied.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter, the more difficult for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier During a handover over the MS to a TDD 3G is set for the BSC to handdecision, if this parameter cell. to Preference for 2G Cell, the BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 2G candidate cells; If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 3G candidate cells; If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred. None

If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. This parameter can only be applied to the fast-moving handover.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered.

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased.

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow load is increased.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow load is increased.

None

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow load is increased.

None

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow load is increased.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be triggered.

If this parameter is set to a too great or too low value, load balancing between the OL subcell and UL subcell is adversely affected. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased.

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased.

This parameter must be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is applied.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is, the more difficult During the to hand over the MS for the BSChandover decision: to a 2G cell and the easier If this parameter is set tothe MS to an FDD 3G cell. BSC for the BSC to hand over Preference for 2G Cell, the first selects the target handover cell from the 2G candidate cells. If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 3G candidate cells. If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is None preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred.

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic.

This parameter must be set to a value that is greater than or equal to the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. When the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail is set to 0, no penalty related to retry times after UtoO handover failure is imposed. That is, the call can still be handed over to the previous target cell after the penalty time.

None

None

This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes.

This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes.

This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes.

None

This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell.

This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell. For the network with a single frequency band, inter-BSC handovers are triggered at the edge of two adjacent cells. Therefore, the recommended value of this parameter is Underlaid Subcell. For a dual-band network (for example, 900/1800 MHz cells), incoming BSC handovers occur frequently and are generally not triggered at the edges of adjacent cells. In this case, the recommended value of this parameter is Overlaid Subcell. In the case that success rate of handovers drops, UL Subcell is preferred for incoming BSC handovers. None

None

None

When TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. is set to 0, the TCH in the OL subcell cannot be assigned preferentially to the MS because no TA is lower than this threshold. In this case, Assign Optimum Layer is set to Underlaid Subcell.

None

None

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.

Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.

#N/A

None

Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.

Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.

Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

Subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle. This parameter affects the ranking of candidate cells. Generally, it is set to 0.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, call drop may easily occur.

Penalty can be performed on only the cell that is not located at the fourth layer.

None

This parameter, together with Forbidden time after MAX Times, determines the frequency of intra-cell handovers.

This parameter to used to disable the intra-cell handover for a certain period.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the intra-cell handover may not be timely; if this parameter is set to a too great value, the system resources may be wasted when intra-cell handovers occur frequently.

When the cell radius is fixed, the smaller the value of this parameter is (the required velocity is higher), the more the difficult fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered. The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered. The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system traffic volume cannot be reduced effectively; if this parameter is set to a too small value, the judgment on whether the MS fast passes a cell may be incorrect. The setting of this parameter affects the width of the handover strip during load handover.

The setting of this parameter affects the load handover time. If it is set to a too greater value, the handover time of each level is long.

The setting of this parameter determines the maximum width of the handover strip during load handover.

The setting of this parameter affects the load handover targeted to the cell. If it is set to a lower value, the number of handover requests that are rejected increases.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of the load handover. If it is set to a lower value, the number of load handovers increases. The value of this parameter should not be set too high. Load handover is allowed only when the system flow is lower than the setting of this parameter. Otherwise, the load on the system is increased. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.

For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a small value. This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter, the handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is not performed. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a lower value, the no downlink measurement report handover cannot be triggered. The handover decision is allowed only when the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a higher value, the no downlink measurement report handover cannot be triggered.

This parameter is set according to the traffic volume.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level drop is required for triggering a rapid level drop handover.

Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. This parameter determines the cell coverage for the TA emergency handover.is set to 0 and if the measurement When this parameter In the areas with small space between BTSs and densely distributedthe FULLSET values report indicates that DTX is not used, BTSs, the coverage of the cell selected. When this parameter is is set to and if should be can be reduced if this parameter set to 0 a lower value. the measurement report indicates that DTX is used, the

SUBSET values should be selected. In latter cases, the SUBSET values should be used irrespective of how DTX is indicated in the subsequent measurement reports. When this parameter is set to 1, whether the FULLSET values or the SUBSET values should be selected depends on the DTX indication bit in thetoo great value,report. Thatcell if If this parameter is set to a measurement the target is, the the previous handover will not be selected for the next for measurement report indicates that DTX is used, the SUBSET valuesthe probability of callotherwise, the FULLSET handover, but should be selected; drop increases. If this values shouldset to a too small value, the probability of parameter is be selected. handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.

The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher This parameter specifies to be handed over to the original value, the MS is unlikely the penalty level imposed on a target cell. A serving cell. penalty level is imposed on a target cell to avoid further attempts when a handover fails due to any of the following reasons: cell congestion, a message indicating internal handover refusal is received, a message indicating Um interface handover failure is received during out-going BSC handover, or a message indicating Um interface handover failure is received during internal handover. This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of penalty time. sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded. When this parameter is set to an excessive value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.

This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.

When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.

Measurement reports fail to be decoded correctly when the signal strength in the serving cell is poor. When the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of this parameter, all previous measurement reports are discarded and the handover may fail. Therefore, Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to a great value for emergency handovers. If the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, this adjacent cell can be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. This parameter should be set on the basis of the data rate and flow on the Abis interface. If the preprocessed MR is sent at a high frequency, the flow on the Abis interface is increased. When MR preprocessing is enabled, the UL and DL balance measurement is affected if Transfer BS/MS Power Class is set to No. In addition, the handovers (such as PBGT handovers, load handovers, and concentric cell handovers) that require power compensation may fail. In 4:1 multiplexing mode, if there are more than two timeslots configured in SDCCH/8 scheme, then this When this parameter is set to NO, the BSC preprocesses the parameter should be set to No. measurement reports. In this case, the Transfer Original MR, Transfer BS/MS Power Class, and Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR parameters are invalid. When this parameter is set to YES, the signaling on the Abis interface and the load of the BSC are reduced. Thus, the response time is shortened and the network performance is improved. When setting this parameter, you should determine whether the BTS is set to the the MS does not use the If this parameter supportsYes, configured power control algorithms. maximum transmit power, and thus the handover success rate is decreased, but the network interference is reduced.

Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. If you need to disable the penalty for a certain handover, set the related penalty time and penalty level to 0.

This parameter should be set to Yes if the inter-BSC SDCCH handover is allowed.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a too great value, handovers cannot be performed timely.

This parameter is used to avoid unwanted handovers If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent due to inaccurate cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a handovers measurement reports generated in the initial phase of value, handovers cannot be performed timely. too greatcall establishment. If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed Measurement Reports smaller than the report frequency of the This parameter can be used to avoid unwanted handovers measurement reports from the MS. Therefore, it is phase due to inaccurate measurement reports in the initial recommended that Min Interval for SDCCH HOs be set to a of call establishment. small value. If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you If measurement reports are the Preprocessed Measurement can set Report Frequency of processed on the BSC side, the frequency of receiving measurement reports thethe BSC Reports smaller than the report frequency of on side is greater than that on the BTS side. Therefore, measurement reports from the MS. Therefore, it is it is recommended that Min Interval for SDCCH HOs be set a a recommended that Min Interval for TCH HOs be set to to great value. small value. If measurement reports are processed on the BSC side, the frequency of receiving measurement reports on the BSC side is greater than that on the BTS side. Therefore, it is recommended that Min Interval for TCH HOs be set to a great value.

None According to the P/N criterion, if the load of a non-BCCH frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. Thus, the TCHs on non-BCCH frequenciesof a non-BCCH According to the P/N criterion, if the load are reserved for other calls.is higher than the call performance of TIGHT calls. frequency This ensures the Load Threshold for other BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. Thus, the TCHs on non-BCCH frequencies are reserved for other calls. This ensures the call performance of other calls. None

The lower the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the AMR half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the AMR full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.

The AMR handover can be triggered only when the Intracell F-H HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes. 1. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too great value, some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value, an unwanted cell may become the candidate cell. This leads to This parameter mustcall properly set because it limits the 1. handover failures or be drops. 2. A cell can become a candidate cell only when the receive number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too level minus this parametercells may be excluded from the great value, some desired is greater than the minimum access level offset. candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value, an unwanted cell may become the target cell. This leads to handover failures or call drops. 2. A cell can become a candidate cell only when the uplink receive level minus this parameter is greater than the minimum access level offset. None Note that in hierarchical handover and load handover, the priority of the target cell must be higher than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. If the DL receive level of a cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold, the cell is listed in the candidate cells based on receive level. The cell takes a low priority for handovers.

None

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.

This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.

None

None

None

None

Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. In other words, the edge handover algorithm is enabled. The lower the layer is, the higher the priority is. The lower the hierarchy is, the higher the priority is. The layered hierarchical handover cannot be triggered if the serving cell has the highest priority in the queue or if the level of the target cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. If this parameter is set to Yes, a call is handed over to the target cell that has a higher priority than the serving cell. Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and In dual-band networking mode adjacent channel interference. for densely populated urban areas, the level drops rapidly due to multiple barriers. The propagation loss of the 1800 MHz frequency band is greater than the propagation loss of the 900 MHz frequency band. Considering the preceding factors, you can enable the Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed for the DCS1800 cell. Under normal conditions, this parameter is set to No. To support the rapid level drop handover, the BSC must have It is original MR. the recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used.

Yes for hot-spot areas; densely populated urban areas, common urban areas, suburbs, and rural areas; No for highspeed circumstances

When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled on the existing network, this parameter can be set to Yes.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the target cell to which the MS is handed over may not be the cell with the best signal quality.

None

None

None

The settings of RXLEV-ACCESS-MIN and CRO should guarantee that cells with same priority have the same cell reselect offset. The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by system. to following conditions: referring Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops below 0 within 5s.If yes, the path loss is too large. C2 of an appropriate non-serving cell exceeds that of the It is recommended that you select a greater value, such as serving or 25, in the area with heavy traffic, but a smaller 16, 20, cell in 5s and the following conditions are met: The such as new cell in anotherwith light traffic. value, C2 of a 2 or 3, in the area LAC minus CRH An MS doesin the systemto pagings during location update. (broadcast not respond information 3 and 4 of the serving Thus, the connection rate drops this parameter, it is cell) exceeds C2 of the serving cell in 5s. To properly specify the value of if cell reselection is performed.to perform overall and long-term measurement A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s, and the C2 of necessary If this parameter is 5 dB regarding their processing of the thethe entities involvedto a too small value, ping-pong on new cell minus set constantly exceeds the C2 location updates serving cell in 5s.occur andas the processing capability of capability and traffic, such the signaling load on the SDCCH increases. A better cell exists if the above conditions are met.If a the MSC and BSC, and the load on the A interface, Abis If this parameter is set reselects a cell,and does not go better cellUm interface, to a too great value, the cell that to interface, exists, the MSHLR, and VLR. the previous update period in themay not be be greater than The MS camps onwithinlong time MSC must the best after location cell for a 5s. the LA changes. that in the BSC. In the GSM system, it is possible that a powered-on MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request within a long period. The larger this parameter is set, the larger the number of When the MS reselects another cell (in the same LAC), the paging sub-channels in a cell and the smallerT3212 of the of MS is restarted through T3212 timeout if the the number MSs cell differs from that of the original cell. new on each paging sub-channel. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the average service of of same LAC, When this parameter differs in the cellslife theMS batteriesit but increase the delay of identified as implicit off-line if the is possible that the MS is paging messages and reduce system performance. MS sends no location update request for a long period. In this case, system plays "The subscriber you dial is power off." even though the called MS is on. None LAC, the value of this parameter should be the same In an in all cells. The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call drops. The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0, only handovers are allowed in a cell, and direct access of an If the not allowed. This condition applies to a dual-network MS is number of RACH conflicts in a cell is small, T should be set to cell. For a common number parameter should be coverage a great value. If the cell, this of RACH conflicts in a cell to large, T should be set to a small value. The increase set is 0. in T value prolongs the access time of an MS, thus affecting The and S of CBA affects the network access of an MS. the access performance of the whole network. Therefore, appropriate values should be selected for T and S. When the network traffic is heavy, the success rate of immediate assignment is low if the sum of S and T is low. Thus, the value of T should be properly adjusted to make the sum of S and T great. When Abis interface use the satellite transmission,this None parameter must be 32.

None

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate.

If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the channel load and influence the access success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this seizes the radio resources too much, and influences the channel resource utilization. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the call reestablishment success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the assignment success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the immediate assignment success rate.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

The assignment procedure can reduce the duration of intracell handover.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to Yes, the asynchronous handover is performed in intra-BSC handover; otherwise, the synchronous handover is performed. If the parameter is set too small, a wrong decision might be made in TRX aiding detection; if the parameter is set too large, a faulty main-BCCH might lead to delayed triggering ofthis parameter is set after too small value, the BSC If TRX aiding function to a cell initialization. initiates cell flow control when receiving the RACH overload message from the BTS. That is, the minimum receive level of MSs is increased to reduce RACH access requests. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the BTS sends the overload message to the BSC when a large number of MSs access the network. In this case, system failure may occur. None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, a wider bandwidth is occupied by services. The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. It is recommended that the default value be used. The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. It is recommended that the default value be used. The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. It is recommended that the default value be used. The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. It is recommended that the default value be used.

None

None If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS frequently sends the overload messages to the BSC. Thus, the system resource utilization decreases and MSs cannot access the network. small, If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS sends an frequently reports overload indication messages to the BSC. overload message to the BSC with a long interval. Thus, As a result, the BSC frequently reports overload indication system faults may occur. messages to the MSC and thus the MSC may initiate flow control. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS sends overload indication messages to the BSC only when a large number of MSs access the network and when the system resources are insufficient. Therefore, the access If the value of this parameter is too small, the signaling are requests on the RACH and all the messages on the PCH traffic on the Abis interface increases and thus the load of discarded. the BSC increases. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BSC cannot process the exceptions in the BTS in time. If this parameter is set to a too small value, RF resource status is reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, RF resource status is not updated in time. Therefore, the BSC cannot handle the interference in the BTS in time.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, radio resource indication messages are reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, radio resource status is not immediately reported and thus the BSC cannot handle the interference in the BTS in time. None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a small value, the error is small.

None

If this parameter is set to a great value, the error is small.

None

For the BTS2X, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, and BTS3002C, this parameter is invalid. For other BTSs, this parameter is valid.

If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS power reduces too much. If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS power reduces less and the power reduction effect is not good. If the value of this parameter is too great, the average result cannot reflect the change correctly. If the value of this parameter is too small, the averaging is performed too frequently and resources are wasted.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to StartUp, the probability that the BTS transmits at full power increases. The interference increases. The handover success rate, however, is increased to some extent.

For V9R3 and later, the VQI can be measured and reported.

For the BTS3002C, if each cell is configured with two TRXs (O2 or S2), Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted is set to Yes. The RF connection supports the configuration of the main and diversity antennas. This parameter is configured for only the BTS3002C.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the dynamic power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded; conversely, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop too great value, the uplink level If this parameter is set to a may easily occur. becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. The value of this parameter is equal to that of the UL Expected Level at HO Access.

None

None

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the

network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the resources.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the dynamic power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed.

None

None

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the

network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports.

None

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal quality of the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the signal quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop too great value, the uplink level If this parameter is set to a may easily occur.

becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected Level at HO Access. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the resources. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the proportion of the history value in the interference measurement results decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the proportion of the history value in the interference measurement results increases.

None

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the output power of the MS decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the output power of the MS increases. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the tolerance of the network to downlink errors decreases and the probability of None the frequent TBF release increases. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the abnormal TBF may occur (such as the MS does not receive the message of current cell in the network caused by the MS activities, and the network still assigns the radio resources to the MS), the If this parameter is set to a lower thus wasting the network network cannot release this TBF, value, the abnormal uplink TBF release resources. increases caused by the overflow of the N3103. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the release time of Based on the actual condition of existing network (for the uplinkthe N3105 overflow caused by the the MS caused example, TBF delays due to no response of bad Um If this parameter is set toquality, thus occupying quality, and by the bad Um interface a lower value, the tolerance of interface quality, the unstable transmission link the link the network to uplink you resources of system. should properly the probability of the MS activities), errors decreases andadjust this parameter the frequent TBF release increases. abnormally release Based on the actual condition of existing network (for to ensure the downlink TBF does not If this parameter is set to a higher value, the bad Um TBF example, the N3101 overflow caused by the due to the frequent overflow of the N3105. abnormal may occur (such the unstable transmission the message of interface quality, as the MS has not receivedlink quality, and current cell in the you should properly adjust this parameter the MS activities), network caused by the MS activities, the If this parameter is set todoes not abnormally release due network still assigns TBF uplink resources this wastes the to to ensure the uplink the a higher value, to the MS), wireless resources and influencesthus the access network network cannot release the N3101. the frequent overflow ofthis TBF, the wasting the performance of other MSs in the network, thus causing the resources. uselesson the actual condition of existing network (for Based signaling seizing the channel bandwidth and wasting the downlinkoverflow caused by the bad Um example, the N3101 resources. If this parameter the unstable transmission uplink TBF interface quality, is set to a lower value, the link quality, and frequently releases and establishes, thus increasing the the MS activities), you should properly adjust this parameter delay for the delay tests of thenot abnormally release due to to ensure the uplink TBF does Attach and Ping services. If this parameter is setof thehigher value, the release delay The original overflow to is N3101. the frequentdownlink TBF a released immediately and of the uplink TBF increases, thus wasting the uplink cannot be used to transmit subsequent downlink data. resources. Therefore, a new TBF must be established. The original If this parameter iscannot a lower value,new uplink TBF of downlink TBF also set to a higher for a the requirement If this parameter is set to be used value, this can increase frequently transmission. Therefore, the duration and uplink datareleases and establishes, thus increasing the the probability of establishing the downlink TBF on the delay forrate of the testsestablishment and Ping services. success thus greatly reducing the downlinkgreatly affected. PACCH, the delay TBF of the Attach are TBF The most optimized value should beMS needs to send new establishment time; however, if the a little greater than the interval between two the BSC6000 does not support the uplink data, because discontinuous uplink transmissions. uplink establishment function on the uplink at present, the reserved uplink TBF must be released and a new TBF must be established to transmit the new data. Therefore, the overall transmission performance decreases. If this parameter is set to a lower value, this can decrease the probability of is set to a higher downlink TBF on the If this parameter establishing the value, the load-based PACCH. Theis triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to reselection downlink TBF must establish on the CCCH, thus increasing the the load-based time. a lower value, establishment reselection is triggered easily. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases, and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the critical reselection is triggered easily. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases, and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the critical reselection is triggered easily.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases, and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the critical reselection is triggered easily. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of cell reselections increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the number of cell reselections decreases. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the probability of the cell reselection increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the probability of the cell reselection decreases. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the precision of decision may be reduced; if this parameter is set to a higher value, the decision may not be performed immediately.

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the weight of the previous signal level increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the weight of current signal level increases.

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is easier for the MS to reselect this cell; if this parameter is set to a lower value, it is difficult for the MS to reselect this cell. If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is difficult to trigger the load-based reselection; if this parameter is set to a lower value, it is easier to trigger the load-based reselection. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS cannot be handed over to the target cell that the previous reselection fails or the load-based reselection occurs within the time longer than this value; conversely, the time greatly reduces. If the value of this parameter increases, the MS can be handed over to the target cell only if the target cell has a higher level; conversely, the MS can be handed over to the target cell only if the target cell has a lower level.

The setting of this parameter is to avoid the ping-pong reselection between cells.

None

None This parameter is configured according to the congestion of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. If the underlaid voice services are congested, the overlaid-tounderlaid subcell handover is only allowed; if the overlaid voice services are congested, the underlaid-to-overlaid handover is only allowed. None

None

None

When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the MS reduces.

When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the MS reduces.

None

For the cell with the good Um interface quality, set the parameter to MCS6; for the cell with the poor Um interface quality, set the parameter to MCS4.

None

None

None

The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is; otherwise, the smaller the proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is.

None

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.

None

None

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.

None

None

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the idle Abis timeslots cannot be fully used. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the Abis timeslots may be applied frequently. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PS services are affected. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the CS services are affected when there are too many PS services.

None If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the dynamic channel resources may be wasted when there are no services for a long time. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that a dynamic channel is requested immediately after being released. Therefore, the dynamic channel request is sent This parameter is configured according to the congestion frequently.the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice counter of

services. If the UL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is converted at the UL cell. If the OL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is If this parameter is cell. converted at the OLset to a lower value, the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and the downlink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher. If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and the downlink bandwidth for lower subscriber TBFs If this parameter is set to a each value, the is lower. established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is lower. If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic channels. If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels.

If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic channels. If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, there are excessive PDCHs and insufficient TCHs. This affects CS services. If this parameter is set to a modest value, there are insufficient PDCHs and excessive TCHs. This affects PS services.

None

If the threshold of HCS signal strength is high, it is difficult for the cell to be selected. If the threshold of HCS signal strength is low, it is easy for the cell to be selected. If the priority is high, it is easy for the MS to select this cell during cell reselection. If the priority is low, it is difficult for the MS to select this cell during cell reselection. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the power consumption and radiation of the MS are high. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS may not be able to access the channel. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the coverage area of the cell is large. The MS on the edge of the cell may not be able to access the system. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the coverage area of the cell is small. The usage of cell resources decreases. None

None

In different routing areas, if this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the period when cell reselection is prohibited increases. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the period when cell reselection is prohibited decreases.

None

None

None

In the same routing area, if this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs.

None

None

None If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access the cell. Therefore, the to an excessive value, it is difficult If this parameter is set system may be overloaded. for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access the cell. Therefore, set system may be overloaded. If this parameter is the to an excessive value, it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access the cell. Therefore, the to an excessive value, it is difficult If this parameter is set system may be overloaded. for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an MS to parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS sends If this access the cell. However, too many MSs may access the cell. Therefore, the within may be overloaded. a new Channel Requestsystem a long interval after the

channel request fails, thus reducing access collisions but slowing down the MS access speed. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS sends a new Channel Request within a short interval after the If this parameter is set to an excessive the MS access channel request fails, thus acceleratingvalue, the MS needs to wait for a long access collisions. speed but adding time before sending the next request. This may affect MS services. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that a response is sent, but the MS has not received it because of transmission delay. In this case, the MS also resends the access request. None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some information may be missing. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many bandwidth resources. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some information may be missing. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many The MS should stay in bandwidth resources. non-DRX mode for a period of time after the measurement report is sent. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS may stay in non-DRX mode for a long time and services may be affected. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS enters the DRX mode and may send the measurement report The principles of cell reselection offset are as follows: frequently. 1. For the cell with low traffic and low equipment usage, Huawei recommends that MSs work in the cell. The value range 0-20 dB is recommended. 2 For the cell with medium traffic, value 0 is recommended. If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell, this parameter should be set to a high value when the coverage area of the micro cell is large.

None

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the extension measurement report is sent frequently. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, measurement information is not obtained timely.

None

None

None

None

None

When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the EGPRS MS is shortened.

None

None

None

None

When the radio operating environment is good, decreasing the parameter value improves the transmission rate. When the radio operating environment is poor, increasing the parameter value reduces the times of abnormally releasing TBFs. PAN_INC should be greater than PAN_DEC. Usually, PAN_INC = 2 x PAN_DEC. However, N3102 cannot exceed PAN_MAX.

None value of this parameter is set to a modest value, the If the MS may retransmits the RLC data block before the BSC sends an Uplink Acknowledgment message. Thus, many radio resources are not used but occupied. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the speed of the sliding window decreases and the probability of the uplink TBF transmission countdown increases, thus decreasing the performance of uplink transmission. To make this value more accurate, you need to estimate the delay in the transmission between the MS and the BSC6 first. This value is set based on the transmission delay. None

It takes a shorter time to send the Immediate Assignment If this parameter is set to a higher non-DRX TBF resources message on all PCHs and AGCHs invalue, the mode than in Some MSs do not support the 11-bit access burst. (including TFI andrecommended.non-DRX mode, the time. If DRX mode. During the period of Therefore, 8bit is timeslots) are reserved for a long TBF no downlink data needs to be sent, many resources are not establishment time decreases, but the power consumption used MS increases. of thebut occupied for a long time. If the timer is set to a monitors paging messages only on In DRX mode, the MS smaller value, the MS releases the TBF resources within a shorter period. However, if the the home paging group, and then receives the Immediate network sends new downlink PDU data blocks and AGCH Assignment message on all the paging packets, the network must initiate a paging or immediate assignmentincreases, reservation blocks. The TBF establishment time procedure. Therefore, the downlink TBF establishment takes but the power consumption of the MS decreases. a longer period. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the TBF If the download data packets fromthe power consumption of establishment time increases but the network are not If the timer is T3192 a lower value, the setnetwork directly received and set to this not expire, the can detect the the MS decreases. If doesparameter is MS to an excessive TBF establishment failure within a decreases but If the TBF sends the TBF Downlink Assignment message to establish value, a Packetestablishment time shorter period. the power establishment fails, the average delay of TBF establishment a new downlink the MS increases. consumption of TBF, thus shortening the packet access is short, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad time. radio environment decreases. In addition, depends on the On one hand, the value of the T3192 timerthe small timer value increases the probability of the retransmission of average transmission interval between two successive the packet access request, thus increasing the probability of downlink data. reassignment by the PCU and wasting system resources. On the other hand, you need to comprehensively analyze If the timer is set of the cell value, the MS takes load of the traffic modelsto a higher and take the service a longerthe period to detect the TBF establishment failure. If are TBF cell into consideration. When network resources the establishment fails, network is not configured with the Gs sufficient, thatGPRS the average delay rate is low, the T3192 Currently, the is the GPRS congestion of packet access is long, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio should beor the PCCCH. Therefore, Network Operation Mode interface set to a large value, shortening the time to environment by default. improving data transmission rate. establish new TBFs and II is selected increases.